JP2017144168A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features on control means.SOLUTION: The game machine includes a first control means. One kind of command among a plurality of kinds of commands is an error related command. The first control means can determine a plurality of kinds of errors. The first control means, when determines as a first error, sets a first error flag. The first control means may perform transmission preparation processing for transmitting the error related command to a second control means in every first cycle. In a state where the first error flag is being set, and if the first cycle is reached, the first control means performs the transmission preparation processing of a first error command as the error related command.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  The conventional game machine is provided with a control means (for example, patent document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement with respect to the control means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising first control means and second control means, wherein the first control means provides a plurality of types of commands to the second control means. A command of one type of the plurality of types of commands is an error-related command, and the first control unit is a unit capable of determining a plurality of types of errors. And one type of the plurality of types of errors is a first error, and the first control means sets a first error flag when the first control unit determines that the first error has occurred. The first control unit performs a process of preparing to transmit the error-related command to the second control unit (hereinafter referred to as “transmission preparation process”) for each first period. Means configured to do so, The first control means executes the transmission preparation process of the first error command as the error-related command when the first period is reached in a state where the first error flag is set. It is a game stand characterized by being a means to perform.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the control means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (E) An example of the 4th symbol display mode is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine of this embodiment in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a subcommand transmission process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a subcommand transmission process. (B) It is a timing chart of subcommand transmission. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine concerning other embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability change area | region relevant setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability change area | region relevant setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure state update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability change area | region control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure related lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table for special drawings. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for symbol determination of a special figure. (A) illustrates the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and (b) illustrates the special figure 2 symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process during symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure display confirmation weight process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a hit start display weight process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power role release process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power role control process. (A-1)-(a-3) It is an example of special electric character operation pattern data. (B-1)-(b-3) It is an example of special electric power operation data. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power remaining ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power operation completion | finish process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an external output signal management process. It is the figure which showed the signal number, signal name, and output condition of an external terminal board signal. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the error alerting | reporting by the pachinko machine. It is a timing chart relevant to the 1st error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) regarding main control part 300 grade. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which alert | reports a magnetic field detection error in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart when the error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 44 (b) is a case where a magnetic detection error and other errors relating to the main control unit 300 and the like are generated. It is an example of the timing chart in the case of doing. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a magnetic detection error and an error relating to other payouts overlap. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which alert | reports a magnetic field detection error and a door opening error in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to a second error related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display corresponding to FIG. . (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and FIG. 10 (b) is an example of an effect display corresponding to FIG. It is a figure shown in time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and FIG. 10 (b) is an example of an effect display corresponding to FIG. It is a figure shown in time series. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a big prize winning prize excess error occurs during the big hit game. It is the figure which showed in time series an example of the effect display which alert | reports a big prize mouth winning excess error in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation display during the alerting | reporting period of the big winning opening prize excess error shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation display during the alerting | reporting of the extra prize winning prize excess error corresponding to FIG.51 (10)-FIG.51 (14). It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect during the alerting | reporting period of a big prize opening prize excess error. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect during the alerting | reporting period of a big prize opening prize excess error. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 at the time of the big prize mouth winning excess error generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 at the time of the big prize mouth winning excess error generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 at the time of the big prize mouth winning excess error generate | occur | producing. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a big prize opening prize excess error has occurred. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a big prize opening prize excess error has occurred.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  <Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  <Back>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to a payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4) described later. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game shop clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  As will be described in detail later, an ornamental symbol display device 208 and an effect device 206 having an effect movable body 224 that imitates a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, in a lower area of the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234, A second variable winning opening 235 is provided, and a normal start opening 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged below the center part of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same structure, and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device wins the special figure display game and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Opening and closing at the number of times (for example, 15 times).

  In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

  <Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, each starting port, winning port, variable winning port A (first variable winning port 234 and / or second variable winning port 235). Receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a passing game ball, a magnetic sensor (wide range magnetic sensor), a front frame door opening sensor 109, an inner frame opening sensor, a lower pan full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; a predetermined symbol display device; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and the like. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the status display unit 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) and a predetermined movable member For example, a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the attacker A, and the like is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 can play the pachinko machine 100 game in the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) or a data display) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. An external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like is output. The “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as an “external concentrated terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name “external terminal board”.

  The payout controller 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, the ROM 406 for storing the control program and various effect data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read out. Use the VRAM 436 work area to generate a display image. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives a detection result of an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the inner frame (main body 104), and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount, control of a launch motor (not shown) that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 Control (not shown) is performed.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  <Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a), five types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 5 (b), There are four types of special symbols “stop” from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as special symbols 2 of special symbol 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  The stop symbol mode of the other special figure 1 will be described. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. The “special drawing E” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  Further, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol. , “Special Figure d” is an outlier symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and the 8R jackpot of “Special Figure c” are notified, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1—Decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 8R special jackpot of "Special Figure b", a combination of symbols in which three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged (For example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” suddenly changes is notified. Then, “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E or the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary diagrams: “general diagram A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general diagram B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  <Example of display during game>

  6 to 8 are diagrams showing an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during one game in time series.

  With reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B, the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment has a special display area below the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 that suggest the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In the present embodiment, four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game can be displayed in one special figure 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900, and the display area 900 is displayed. The area is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d correspond to the first to fourth hold orders of the special figure 1 variable game, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area 900a. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d, 2 to 4 hold icons can be displayed. Each hold icon corresponding to the eye hold can be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, a special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 that suggests the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. As in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 can display four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the holding of the special figure 2 increases. In the following description of the present embodiment, an example of a change in the state of each component (for example, an example of a change in the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) accompanying the increase or decrease of the special figure 1 hold will be described. When there is an increase / decrease in the holding of the special figure 2, it can be displayed in the same manner. For convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900 in some cases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, the display area above the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 is displayed in the special figure 1 for suggesting that the special figure 1 variable game (during the special figure 1 fluctuation) is in progress. Four symbol display area 208e, a special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f for suggesting that a special symbol 2 variable game is in progress (during special graph 2 variation), 4th symbol display area 208g for general purpose for suggesting that it is changing). The special symbol 1 4th symbol display area 208e turns off (or flashes) the image of ○ during the special game 1 variable game, and lights up the image of ○ when the special game 1 variable game is stopped. Similarly, the 4th symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 displays an image of △, and the 4th symbol display area 208g for general graphic displays an image of ◇, and is turned off (or blinked) during each variable game. Lights up when is stopped.

  Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided.

  These configurations are the same in all of the following embodiments (examples) unless otherwise specified.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights two LEDs to notify that there are two holdings in the special figure 1. Both the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are turned on, and it is informed that both the special figure 2 and the ordinary figure holdings are 0.

  The 4th symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 (and the 4th symbol display area 208f for the special figure 2 and the 4th symbol display area 208g for the special figure) is lit up to notify that the variable game has stopped. Yes. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4 -decoration 1 -decoration 7”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the hold icon display area 900 (the first area 900a and the second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown, respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5A, a circular (sphere) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. In addition, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

  Next, in the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special figure hold is consumed, the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns off one of the two LEDs, turns on one LED, and the fourth graphic display area 208e for the special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates that the image of ○ is off (or flashing).

  In the hold icon display area 900, the timing shown in FIG. 6C is the movement animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon PI1 of the first area 900a corresponding to the digested hold moves to the change icon display area 800 ( Alternatively, the hold icon deletion animation) and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are shown. Specifically, an animation in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right side is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are continuously executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state where the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is a state in which the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is started in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. As shown in (b) to (f) in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the hold is digested, first, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is displayed. After the light is turned off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off the image of ○ (or blinks). Thereafter, the hold icon PI executes animations of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the symbol variation display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. Any of these state changes may be executed first in a sequential manner, and may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the chance button is displayed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. Image).

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. In addition, an image of the character (donor) is also displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 (execution of a decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is in the state before the time further elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (for example, before the reception period of 6 seconds elapses) (FIG. ) Shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, A character display “Chance!” And a character image (dono) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a notice effect is displayed as an example, another effect display may be sufficient.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6 (j) and (k) are in a state in which an effect corresponding to the result of determination of success / failure, the variation time and the winning notice effect is started, triggered by the operation of the chance button 136. In the same figure, (j) and (k) show an example of reach display in the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is the start state of super reach production, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display (decreasing display of decorative symbols) is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, the change icon CI erase timing, the white back timing, and the decorative symbol reduction display timing are the first to be executed sequentially. It may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously. In addition, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI may be displayed during the super reach production, or some of them may be hidden.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (m), FIG. 7 (n), FIG. 7 (o) to FIG. 7 (q), for example, the execution of a swordsman reach production that confronts a swordsman character with a sword is started. It is in the state. Here, as an example, the swordsman character and the character “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. 6 (m)), and then the confrontation scenes of the character (dono) and the swordsman character are displayed (FIG. 6 (n) to FIG. 7). q)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (q) displays a scene in which the character (dono) wins over the swordsman character. In FIG. 7 (r), a combination of symbols (for example, a promising big hit) is displayed in a reduced display of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 4 (t) hits the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner, the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (v), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the “probability big hit” character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (t) ′ to FIG. 7 (v) ′ is continued from FIG. 7 (s) when the big hit reach effect (the reach effect of the decoration 6) is started in FIG. 6 (k). It is timing. This timing is displayed after the jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is shaken and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ((t) ′ in the figure). A decorative symbol stop display is performed ((u) 'in the same figure), the decorative symbol stop display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and a "big hit" character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same as above) FIG. (V) ′).

  FIG. 8 shows a display example in the case of a swordsman reach production.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (a) is the timing following FIG. 7 (p), and displays a scene in which the character (dono) loses to the swordsman character. Further, in FIG. 8B, in the reduced display of the decorative symbols, the fluctuation variation display of the shifted symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is performed, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed with a swinging variation display of a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) and a hold icon display. The hold icon PI1 is displayed again in the area 900, and the change icon CI is displayed again in the change icon display area 800. Moreover, in the same figure (e), the stop display of a decoration symbol is performed in the symbol display area 208a-208c, and the image of (circle) is light-displayed in the 4th symbol display area 208e for special figures.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g) indicate that, in the change icon display area 800, the change icon deletion animation executed when the special icon change game ends and the change icon CI is deleted. The executed state is shown, and the timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the deletion animation of the variation icon is completed.

  In the above example, the variation icon CI is erased after the special symbol variation is stopped. However, the variation icon CI is erased at other timing (for example, after the decorative symbol is stopped displayed or during the variation of the decorative symbol). ). Further, the change icon CI may be deleted in one frame instead of the change icon deletion animation.

  <Structure confirmation machine with frequency>

  With reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 11, a structure-accurate change machine with number of times (pachinko machine 100) according to another example of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, each Example (modification) of this embodiment and each Example (modification) of other embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

  The structural accuracy changing machine with the number of times allows or not to enter a specific area (probability changing operation area, probability changing area, V area) by the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker not shown). Is a pachinko machine 100.

  FIG. 9 is a front view showing a game board 200 according to another example of the present embodiment. In this example, the gaming board 200 is provided with an attacker unit 810 instead of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. It is. Other identical components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The game board 200 has a decorative symbol display device 208 disposed almost in the center thereof, a first special figure start port 230 and an out port 240 disposed below the game symbol board 200, and a general diagram start port on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. 228 and the second special figure starting port 232 are arranged, and the attacker unit 810 is arranged on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (below the second special figure starting port 232).

  In this attacker unit 810, whether or not to enter the specific area (probability changing operation area 808) is sorted by the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of the second attacker 804).

  An attacker unit 810 is provided at the upper front and is provided with a door member 802a that opens and closes so as to be visible to the player (first attacker) 802, and is not visible to the player inside the lower part of the first attacker 802. And an attacker having a shutter-type door member (second attacker 804).

  The attacker unit 810 starts a big hit when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214). In a predetermined round “the second attacker 804 is opened and the V shutter provided inside the second attacker 804 (not shown) is opened”, the game ball is placed in the second attacker 804. When a player enters a V-pass switch (probable operating region 808, probable changing region, V region or V winning region) that cannot be viewed by a player, the game state after the big hit ends A certain) state is given. Even if the V shutter is closed, if the game ball passes through the V passing switch when the probability variation operation region is in the valid state, the probability variation state is given. As described above, the structure probability changing machine (also referred to as V (winning) probability changing machine) determines whether or not the game ball can enter the probability changing operation area 808 by the opening pattern of the second attacker 804.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine (V winning probability changing machine) 100 of this embodiment, a big hit game including a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the probability changing operation area (V winning area) 808 according to a special drawing is started. It is determined whether to start the big hit game including the round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that becomes difficult to win is made, and the opening pattern of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 is determined for each symbol Has been. Then, the second attacker 804 is released in a predetermined round (for example, 4R) during the big hit, and further, a shutter (not shown) in the back is opened, and the game ball enters the probability changing operation area 808. Then, the operation of the probability changing function starts (shifts to the probability changing state) after the big hit game ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment (a structure probability variation machine with a number of times shown in FIG. 9, a V winning probability variation machine), The types of special drawings and ordinary drawings that are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the normal symbol display device 210 will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  In FIG. 10 (a), three types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure C” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 10 (b), Two types of "Special Figure a" and "Special Figure b" are shown as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 12 round (12R) jackpot symbol (substantial 8R probability variable jackpot symbol), and “Special Figure B” is a 12R jackpot symbol (substantially 8R normal jackpot symbol). Yes, "Special Figure C" is an outlier design. Both “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, but “Special Figure A” is a game ball in the probability variation operation region (V region) 808 of the attacker unit 810. Is a big hit of the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is easy to enter (for example, 100 ms opening → 3400 ms closing → 28000 ms opening), while “Special Figure B” is a game ball in the probability variation operating region (V region) 808 Is the big hit of the opening pattern (for example, 100 ms opening) of the second attacker 804 that is difficult to enter. Here, the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker 804 in this embodiment operates in a constant opening pattern (for example, 50 ms opening → 2950 ms closing → 28500 ms opening) regardless of the design. The opening pattern of the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker may be determined for each symbol. “Special Figure A” has a prescribed number of rounds of 12R, but 9R to 12R has an opening time of 1R to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R, 5 to 5R) for the special winning opening (second attacker 804). Since the 8R opening pattern is significantly shorter (for example, 100 ms) than the 29000 ms opening), it can be said that the 8R opening pattern does not substantially open, so it is also referred to as a “substantially 8R probability variation big hit symbol”. Similarly, in “Special Figure B”, the prescribed number of rounds is 12R, but 9R to 12R are 1R to 3R, 5 to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R, 5 to 8R, etc.) Since the opening pattern is significantly shorter (for example, 100 ms) compared to 29000 ms opening), it can be said that the opening pattern does not substantially open, so it is also referred to as “substantially 8R normal big hit symbol”. In this embodiment, the opening patterns of 9 to 12R of special figure A and special figure B are made the same, but the opening pattern of special figure B is substantially the same as the opening pattern for normal 12R (for example, 9R to 12R is 1). -3R, the same opening pattern as 5-8R, etc. The opening pattern that allows the game ball to easily enter into the attacker (may be an opening pattern different from 1-3R, 5-8R), or conversely The opening pattern of the special figure A may be a substantially 12R probability changing opening pattern.

  Further, the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special big hit symbol (substantially 16R probability variable big hit symbol), and “special figure b” is a missed symbol. “Special figure a” is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and is a big hit of a shutter opening pattern in which a game ball easily enters the probability variation operation region (V region) 808. Further, in the case of “special chart a”, after the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to the electric support (probability change) state, and is also referred to as “substantial 16R probability change big hit symbol”.

  It should be noted that all of “Special Figure A”, “Special Figure B”, and “Special Figure a” are in the electric support state after the big hit game is completed (regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation operation area 808) Move to the state shown in the figure).

  FIG. 10 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative symbols of the present embodiment are displayed differently depending on the game state (normal state (non-electric support state) or electric support (probability change / short time) state). As shown in FIGS. 1C and 1C, there are ten types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” in the normal state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 2C and 2C, in the electric support state, there are seven types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 7” which are different from the normal state.

  Then, as shown in (c) and (3) of the same figure, in the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, when the special 8R probability big hit of "Special figure A" or the real 8R normal big hit of "Special figure B" is notified. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1−”) in which the same ornament symbols of (c) and (1) in FIG. “Decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, etc.) Further, when notifying the substantial 8R probability variation jackpot of “special drawing A”, for example, the symbol combination (“decoration 7-decoration 7” in which three “decoration 7” of the ornamental symbols of FIG. -Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2, when the substantial 16R probability variation big hit of the special figure “a” is notified in the electric support state, the “decoration 7” of the decorative symbol of FIG. A series of symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the normal state, when the substantial 16R probability variation jackpot of “special drawing a” is notified, a combination of symbols (“decoration 7− Decoration 7-Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  In the case where the jackpot of “special drawing A” or “special drawing B” is notified in the electric support state, the same symbols other than “decoration 7”, for example, are the decorative symbols of FIG. A combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Also, in this case, the same decorative design is used except for a combination of symbols in which three “decorations 7” of the decorative symbols in FIGS. 2C and 2C are arranged (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). You may stop-display three symbol combinations that are not lined up (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”).

  On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol C or the special symbol b, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, during the electric support, the jackpot of “special drawing A” or “special drawing B” is notified by a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”) where three identical ornamental symbols do not line up. In this case, in the case of a deviation from “Special Figure C” or “Special Figure b”, the symbol combination of the big numbers that notify “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure B” is not displayed, but may be displayed. Good. In addition, when notifying the “special drawing C” or “special drawing b” in the electric support, only a specific symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6”) may be displayed. Any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations may be displayed.

  FIG. 10 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary diagrams: “general diagram A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general diagram B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  FIG. 10E shows an example of the fourth symbol notification. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for indicating that the special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is in progress, and the special figure 2 variable game (figure of special figure 2). 4) The 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 for indicating that it is middle) is provided. The 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 and the 4th symbol display means for special figure 1 are LEDs, respectively, and the indication is performed by turning on and off the LEDs. In this example, the 4th symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 have the same notification mode, and the LED is repeatedly turned on and off during the variable game. In case of detachment, it goes out.

  <Example of effect display>

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display in time series in the pachinko machine (structure-accurate structure variable machine) 100 shown in FIGS. 9 and 10.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (1) is selected as “Special Figure A” (substantial 8R probability variable big hit symbol) in the first rotation of the variable game of Special Figure 1 in the normal state (non-electric support state). This is a state in which the big hit effect is started.

  At this timing, the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the display of the characters “battle bonus” indicates that the effect is being executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 4th symbol display means (LED 812 for special figure 1) for indicating that it is during special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation), special figure 2 4th symbol display means for special figure 2 (LED 814 for special figure 2) for suggesting that the game is changing (during the fluctuation of special figure 2). The special figure 1 LED 812 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 1 variable game, and is turned on when the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and the big win is won, and is turned off when the game is off. Similarly, the special figure 2 LED 814 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 2 variable game, is turned on when the special figure 2 variable game is stopped and the big win is won, and is turned off when the game is off (FIG. 10). (See (e)). At this timing, the special figure 1 LED 812 is turned on, and the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and a big win is informed. The special figure 2 LED 814 is turned off.

  Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided. At this timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying “Special figure A”.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 2 (2), an image imitating the game board 200 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hitting suggestion display is performed in the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. The hitting suggestion display is a display for notifying the player that the period to be right-handed or the period to be left-handed has started. Here, a right-handed suggestion display (for example, the display of a character “right-handed!” In a first-handed way suggestion display area 710 provided near the center of the display area, and an arrow indicating a right-handed strike on the game board 200 is displayed. Display) to notify that the period to be right-handed has started. The hitting suggestion display may be an effect display included in the jackpot start effect, but may be an effect different from the jackpot start effect. Further, a lighting suggestion effect (for example, lighting of the lamp in the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) by other effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106), a speaker 120, etc. Alternatively, a sound “right-handed!” (Right-handed notification sound) may be output from the speaker 120 when the hit suggestion display is being performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 3 (3) shows a state where the 1R-th jackpot game has started. Here, the right strike suggestion display (first right strike suggestion display) in the first strike suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased (not displayed), and a battle effect is executed in the display area. . In this example, the characters “battle effect” are displayed in the display area, indicating that the effect is being executed. Further, the number of acquired balls (here, “0pt”) is displayed at the upper right of the display area, and a small right-handed suggestion display (here, “right-handed” is displayed in the second-hit method suggestion display area 712 at the upper left of the display area. ”And a right-pointing arrow) to inform that it is in the period to be right-handed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) shows a state in which the third hit of the big hit game has started. At this timing, as an example, an effect that suggests that the winning of “Special Figure A” makes it easier for the game ball to enter the probability change operation area 808 (after transitioning to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game). (V prize suggestion production) has started. Here, the display of the characters “battle victory effect” indicates that the effect is being executed. The acquired number of balls is displayed as a cumulative value (in this example, “252 pt”), and the right hit suggestion display (second right hit suggestion display) is continued in the second hit suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) shows a state where the 4R-th jackpot game has started. At this timing, the V prize suggestion effect (here, the letters “Aim at the V attacker!” And the downward-pointing arrow indicating the position of the attacker unit 810) is being performed). In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712. It should be noted that a V winning suggestion effect (for example, blinking of the lamp around the attacker, or “V” from the speaker 120 by “V” by other effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106) and the speaker 120. A voice (such as outputting a right-handed notification sound) may be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (6) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the probability variation operation region 808 (the state in which a V prize is won) in the 4R of the big hit game. At this timing, an effect of notifying that a V prize has been won (in this case, the display of the letter “V”) is performed, which suggests that a promiscuous state is reached after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (7) shows a state where the 6R-th jackpot game has started. At this timing, the round effect after the V prize (the effect until the remaining number of rounds (the prescribed 12R, substantially 8R) ends) is executed. Here, as an example, the display of the characters “Round effect after battle victory” indicates that the effect is being executed. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8) shows a state where the 8R-th jackpot game has ended. At this timing, the round effect after the V prize is continuously executed. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712.

  FIG. 9 (9) shows the effects executed in the 9th to 12th R of the jackpot game. During this period, the round effect after the V prize is continued. In addition, the right-hand suggestion display is continued in the second hitting suggestion display area 712. “Special figure A” is a big hit symbol of 12R for the specified number of rounds, but 9R to 12R are set with a remarkably short opening time of the attacker unit 810, and the big hit game ends at the actual 8R. No increase after 8R. In the second strike suggestion display area 712, the right strike suggestion display is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) executes the effect of notifying the end of the jackpot game (in this example, the display of the characters “Yoshimune RUSH rush!”). In the second hit suggestion display area 712, the right The suggestion display is continued.

  In FIG. 11, the effect of notifying that the V winning is the same as that of the 4Rth is continued to be executed during the 5Rth (between FIGS. 11 (6) and (7)).

  Also, if the V prize is not won at the 4th R in FIG. 6 (6), the effect (for example, notifying the V prize is not given at the 5R (between FIG. 11 (6) and FIG. 7)) (for example, Or displaying the entire display area in gray).

  In addition, when “Special Figure B” (actual 8R normal jackpot) is won, a battle failure effect is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 4 (4), and a V prize suggestion effect is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (5). Is not executed. In that case, the normal round effect (the effect until the end of the remaining number of rounds (regulated 12R, substantially 8R) is completed with an effect different from the round effect after the battle win) after (5) in FIG. You may make it perform.

  <Main control unit main loop processing>

  Next, the process which the control part of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment performs is demonstrated. First, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of main control unit main loop processing.

  In step S101 of the main control unit main loop process for starting the execution of the main control unit main loop process, the main control unit 300 clears the counter value of the WDT 314 in step S103 after setting the interrupt prohibition. , The time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S107, after setting interrupt permission, in step S109, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this subcommand transmission processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing for transmitting the command is performed (details will be described later). To do). In step S111, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S113. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S113, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9V) or more. : Yes), the process returns to step S101 to continue the main control unit main loop process, and if it is less than the predetermined value (step S113: No), the process proceeds to step S115. In step S115, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  <Subcommand transmission processing>

  Next, the subcommand transmission process (step S109) executed in the main control unit main loop process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 and FIG. 14A are flowcharts of the subcommand transmission process. FIG. 14B is a timing chart of subcommand transmission.

  A command (subcommand) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is stored in a predetermined buffer. In the subcommand transmission process of this embodiment, after a certain command indicated by the buffer pointer is transmitted three times (the same command is transmitted three times), the pointer moves to the next, and the next command is transmitted. For this reason, the buffer in which the subcommand is stored indicates a subcommand setting pointer indicating a storage area of a command to be transmitted (set) next, and a storage area of a command that has already been transmitted (the same command has been transmitted three times). It has a subcommand transmission pointer. If the subcommand setting pointer matches the subcommand transmission pointer, the command indicated by the subcommand setting pointer is already transmitted.

  In step S201, a subcommand setting pointer is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, the subcommand setting pointer is compared with the subcommand transmission pointer, and the process proceeds to step S205.

  In step S205, it is determined whether there is a subcommand to be transmitted. That is, when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer match, there is no subcommand to be transmitted next, but when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer do not match (for example, the subcommand setting pointer If the address is larger), the subcommand to be transmitted next is set in the buffer. In this step, if there is no subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S245, and if there is a subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S207, in order to move to the next subcommand to be transmitted, the subcommand transmission pointer is obtained and updated by adding 1, and the process proceeds to step S209. In step S209, 1 is subtracted from the subcommand continuous transmission counter and updated. A numerical value from 0 to 3 is set in the subcommand continuous transmission counter, and “3” is set when the subcommand is transmitted first. That is, when the subcommand is transmitted for the first time (in the case of the first transmission), the subcommand continuous transmission counter is set to “2” by this step. In the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter is set to “1” by this step. In the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter is set to “1”. 0 ".

  In step S211, it is determined whether or not the transmission is the third transmission of the same subcommand (the subcommand continuous transmission counter is “0”), and the transmission corresponds to the third transmission of the same subcommand (“0 ”), The process proceeds to step S213. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S213, the initial value “3” is set in the subcommand continuous transmission counter, and the process proceeds to step S215. In step S215, the subcommand transmission data in the buffer corresponding to the current subcommand transmission pointer (subcommand transmission pointer acquired in step S207) is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S217. In step S217, the subcommand transmission pointer is updated (in step S207, 1 is added to move to the updated pointer).

  In step S219, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) and the number of command transmissions are set. Here, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) is set to the period (1) shown in FIG. 14B (for example, the time required to set data in the port (60 μs as an example)). The number of command transmissions is “2”, which is the number of times the strobe signal is turned off at this timing and then turned on (the number of times (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 14B is turned on and off). Is set.

  In step S221 following step S219, an interrupt prohibition process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2223. In step S223, a subcommand continuous transmission counter is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S225 shown in FIG.

  In step S225 of FIG. 14A, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the first time (the subcommand continuous counter is “3”). In the case of the first time, the process proceeds to step S227. If not, the process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S227, the subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S229. In step S229, whether the set loop count (the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) set in step S219 or the data holding wait loop count (period) set in step S237) is 0 (FIG. 14). Period (1) shown in (b) (period from t1 to t2), period (2) shown in FIG. 14B (period from t2 to t3), period (4) (period from t4 to t5) ) And (6) (whether the respective periods from t6 to t7 have elapsed) or not. If 0, the process proceeds to step S231; otherwise, the process returns to step S227. In step S227 and step S229, the period of (1) and (3) (period from t3 to t4), the period of (5) (period from t5 to t6) shown in FIG. The subcommand data continues to be output during the periods (2), (4), and (6) shown in b).

  In step S231, the command transmission count set in step S219 is updated by subtracting 1, and the process proceeds to step S233. In step S233, it is determined whether or not the number of command transmissions is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S235, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S239.

  In step S235, the strobe signal is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S237. In step S237, the number of data holding wait loops (period) is set. The number of data holding wait loops (period) is each period (2), (4), and (6) shown in FIG. After step S237, the process proceeds to step S227.

  For example, in steps S227 and S229, the subcommand data continues to be output (the number of command transmissions is “2”) during the period of the number of wait loops before strobe output (the period (1) shown in FIG. 14B). When the loop count becomes 0 (when the period (1) shown in FIG. 14B elapses), the command transmission count becomes “1” in step S231, and 1 in the data holding wait loop in step S237. The number of times (the period (2) shown in FIG. 14B) is set, and the subcommand data is output in step S227. In this example, the subcommand data continues to be output even during the period of the number of wait loops before strobe output (period (1) shown in FIG. 14B), but the first sub-control unit 400 can receive it. The subcommand data is output during the first data holding wait loop (period (2) shown in FIG. 14B) after the strobe signal is turned on.

  In step S239, the strobe signal is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the subcommand continuous transmission counter updated by subtracting 1 in step S209 is set, and the process proceeds to step S243. Step S241 is a step that proceeds when the number of command transmissions is 0 in the determination of step S233, that is, after the first number of times (a period (2) shown in FIG. 14B) has elapsed, for example, in the data holding wait loop. Yes, in this step, the subcommand continuous transmission counter is set to a value updated by -1. That is, the “first time” of subcommand continuous transmission includes the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) and the number of times of the first data holding wait loop (periods (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 14B). ). Further, the “second time” of the subcommand continuous transmission includes the period in which the strobe signal is turned off after the first number (period) of the data holding wait loop and the second number of times of the data holding wait loop (FIG. 14B). (Periods (3) and (4)). Further, the “third time” of the subcommand continuous transmission includes the period in which the strobe signal is turned off after the second number (period) of the data holding wait loop and the third number of times of the data holding wait loop (FIG. 14B). (Periods (5) and (6)). The command transmission count set in step S219 is “2”, which is the number of times the strobe signal is turned off and on in each of the first to third subcommand continuous transmission counts.

  After step S241, the process proceeds to step S243. In step S243, it is determined by the subcommand transmission counter set in S241 whether or not the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the third time (that is, the third time of the data holding wait loop has been completed), and the continuous transmission of the subcommand is performed. When the number of times is the third time, the process proceeds to step S245, and when the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is not the third time, the process proceeds to step S247.

  In step S245, the subcommand data set in the port is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S247. In step S247, the subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S249. In step S249, an interrupt permission process is performed, and the process ends. Note that the subcommand data output in step S247 is the subcommand data set in the port in step S247 that proceeds to the case of “No” in the determination in step S243 (from the first to the third time in the data holding wait loop). When the determination in step S243 is “Yes”, in step S247 that proceeds from step S245, since the subcommand data is cleared in S245, a signal (clear signal) indicating that no data is set in the port is output. (After t7 in FIG. 14B).

  In this example, the strobe signal after the first time of the data holding wait loop is off (the period (3) shown in FIG. 14B), and the strobe signal after the second time of the data holding wait loop. Is the off period (period (5) shown in FIG. 14B), the subcommand transmission process is terminated and the next step of the main control unit main loop process shown in FIG. It is a period (for example, 90 μs) until the sub-command transmission process (step S109) is executed again in the main control unit main loop process in the flow shown in FIGS. Since it takes time to set data in the port before the first data holding wait loop (for example, 60 μs), the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the first time. In this case, the processing from step S225 to step S229 is executed to secure the time for setting data in the port, whereas when the number of continuous transmissions of subcommands is the second and third times, subcommand transmission is performed. When the process is completed, the process returns to the main control part main process loop, so that the process (step S227 and step S229) when the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the first time becomes unnecessary.

  In this example, the same subcommand is transmitted three times, but may be configured to be transmitted only once. In that case, the processing of S209 to S217, S223 to S225, and S241 to S243 becomes unnecessary. Further, the same subcommand may be transmitted a plurality of times other than 3.

  <Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S301, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S303 and step S305, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S105 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S307, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S341. When the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S307: No), the process proceeds to step S309. move on. Here, the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set when the main control unit 300 is turned on is not 0, that is, in step S307, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S309. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S309, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in this embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S339. If the specific error is not occurring (step S309: No), the process proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S313, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The RAM 308 monitors whether or not signals relating to switches such as the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234, the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) are input. Store in the signal state storage area.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S315, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S313 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S315, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In addition, in the winning opening winning process in step S315, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 The value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting port is read, and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S315, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235, The determination is made using the determination result whether or not the winning determination pattern information matches. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the first variable winning opening. The same applies to the second variable prize winning opening 235. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed. The special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  In step S317, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S319, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 (the number of discharged balls) is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S321, probability variation region related setting processing is performed. The probability variation area related setting process will be described later.

  In step S323, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S325, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of a plurality of processes in accordance with the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S327, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the bellows member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the bellows member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), during the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec), the tongue member A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S329.

  In step S327, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S329, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S313 are read, the presence / absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and if a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning ports 234, 235, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first special special unit via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Details of the device monitoring process will be described later.

  In step S331, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. Details of the external output signal management processing will be described later. In step S333, a subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, a command (subcommand) requested to be transmitted in various processes is set in the transmission buffer, and preparations for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. In the subcommand management process, when the subcommand transmission request flag is set in each process in the timer interrupt process, the subcommand corresponding to the command type corresponding to each process (for example, in the device monitoring process) If the subcommand transmission request flag is turned on, an error command is issued, and the subcommand (special figure 1 or 2 prefetch information command) transmission request is turned on in the special figure random number acquisition process in the prize winning prize process. If this happens, the corresponding special drawing prefetch command) is set in the buffer, and the subcommand setting pointer is set.

  The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the subcommand transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning ports 234, 235 Includes the presence or absence of a prize. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize at the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235, the big prize slot prize command transmission request flag is turned on in the prize slot prize process, and the subcommand management is performed. In the process, the winning prize winning command is set in the buffer.

  In addition, when the special figure processing state is updated to the change waiting state in the special figure state update process, the transmission request flag of the subcommand (game state command) is turned on, and the command data is stored in the RAM 308. Status (normal figure change state, short-time state, normal electric utility open extended state (state in which electric Chu open time is extended)), special figure status (special figure probability variation flag, special figure short-time state) Value, set variation pattern table, special figure variation time shortening variation number of times (number of time reductions, in this case, the number of times that the positive variation state with electric support is continued (for example, 150 times) and the number of times the electric support state is continued (for example, 100 times)), information indicating the special figure processing state is set.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure change start command) is set to ON in the lottery process per special figure, the fluctuation pattern table stored in the RAM 308 is stored in the command data in the subcommand management process. Types per figure (for example, 15R special jackpot symbol (Special Figure A) in FIG. 5, 12R big jackpot symbol (Special Figure A) in FIG. 10), Special figure type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2), Special Figure 1 related Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special symbol variation stop command) is set to ON in the process during symbol variation, information indicating the type per special symbol, the special symbol type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 in the command data Set.

  When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (winning port winning command) is set to ON in the winning port winning process, the winning port where the switch (sensor) turned on, which is stored in the RAM 308, is turned on as command data, or Set information indicating the gate.

  Also, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit start command) is turned on in the special figure display determination wait process, information indicating the type of special figure stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. .

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit end command) is turned on in the special electric utility operation end process, information indicating the type of special figure stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (big prize opening command) is turned on in the special power combination release processing, the number of big hit rounds (number of special power operations) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the type per special figure, etc. Set the information indicating.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (big prize opening closing command) is turned on in the special electric utility operation process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds, the type per special figure, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. .

  In addition, when the transmission request for the subcommand (the special figure 1 prefetch information command or the special figure 2 prefetch information command) is turned on in the special figure random number acquisition process in the prize opening prize process, the special figure to be prefetched is displayed. In response, the number of pre-reading suspending balls, the pre-reading determination result, the type of pre-reading per pre-reading, the pre-reading timer number, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In subcommand management processing, rotation start setting transmission processing, rotation stop setting transmission processing, winning effect setting transmission processing, large winning opening opening setting transmission processing, large winning opening closing setting transmission processing, end effect setting transmission processing, etc. You may make it perform. For example, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R big hit flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. Further, the general command special figure hold increase process may be performed in the subcommand management process. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S335, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S337, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S339, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S301 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  In step S341, a sub-control activation wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. As the predetermined command, at least one of a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs. A command indicating that a state has occurred, a command indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred, a command indicating that a lower pan full error has occurred, and that a payout ball shortage error has occurred. Error, main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), command indicating that a CR unit unconnected error has occurred, launch position command (depending on the state) Command for notifying the launch position).

  <Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning slot winning process (step S315) of the main control unit timer interruption process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 17A to 17C and FIGS. 18A to 18C). 17A to 17C are examples of the prefetch result storage unit of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 and the pachinko machine 100 having the stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5, and FIGS. c) is an example of a pre-reading result storage unit of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 9 and the pachinko machine 100 (the number of times structure confirmation machine) having the stop pattern shown in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RAM 308, the special look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 that stores the pre-fetch result of special figure 1 and the special-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of FIG. 1 as the special figure 1 prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S501). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S503, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S503, the increased special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value pair) is used as the special control state update process (step S325) of the main control unit timer interrupt process (FIG. 15). Prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process performed in step S1, the special figure 2 random value storage area is prefetched. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is performed before the success / failure determination processing in the processing. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 505 subsequent to step S 503, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S509. If it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the main control unit Return to main processing.

  In step S509, based on various flags in the RAM 308, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S511, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S515. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S511, the increased special figure 1 start information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value set) is used as the special control state update process (step S325) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. Before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process performed in step S1, the special figure 1 random value storage area is prefetched. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is performed before the success / failure determination processing in the processing. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S513 subsequent to step S511, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control part main process.

  In step S515, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit main interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described subcommand transmission process, only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increment may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or all the pre-read result storage units for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stored. The prefetch result may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  <Prefetch result information>

  FIG. 17 shows the pre-reading result information stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 and the pachinko machine 100 having the stop symbol form shown in FIG. The state in which is stored is illustrated. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  FIG. 18 shows the prefetching in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 16 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 9 and the pachinko machine 100 having the stop symbol form shown in FIG. A state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the result storage unit is illustrated. FIG. 18A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 18A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special figure C” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special figure C” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (substantially 8R probability variation big hit) is stored as the stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure" as the stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" “C” (out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 18B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 18B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing b” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 18B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 18 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 18C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. And may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  <Probability region related setting processing>

  Next, the probability variation area related setting process (step S321) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 20 are flowcharts of the probability variation region related setting process. Note that the probability change area refers to a probability change operation area 808 (V area or V prize area) provided in the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  In step S601, the special winning opening exhaust excess abnormality flag and the solenoid abnormality flag are cleared. The large winning mouth discharge excess abnormality flag indicates that the number of game balls discharged from the game area 124 (the number of discharged balls) is a game in which a winning game (for example, the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 9) has won a prize. This flag is set (turned on) when the number is greater than the number of balls (number of balls entered). Here, the number of entered balls is detected and counted by a ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the second attacker 804. In addition, the number of discharges is a ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO1) provided in a V passage switch (probability change operation region (probability change region) 808) provided invisible to the player in the second attacker 804, and It is detected and counted by a ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO2) provided at the out port 240. When the value of the number of balls entered (count switch SW) is equal to the value of the number of discharges (total of the out switch SO1 and out switch SO2) (when the difference between the two is 0), the state is normal.

  In this example, a case where one count switch is provided will be described as an example, but a plurality of count switches (count switch SW1, count switch SW2,...) May be provided. In this example, a case where two out switches SO1 and SO2 are provided will be described as an example. However, one out switch SO may be provided.

  The solenoid abnormality flag is a flag that is set (turned on) when the first variable prize opening 234, the second variable prize opening 235, or the solenoid of the attacker unit 810 operates abnormally.

  In step S603, the probability variation area-related passing number (number obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the number of balls entered) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, the edge of the switch to be determined (for example, if the second variable winning port 235 (large winning port 2) is valid, either the count switch SW2 or the out switch SO) is changed on or off. ) Is detected, and if detected, the process proceeds to step S607, and if not detected, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S607, it is determined whether or not the switch in which the edge is detected is the count switch (count switch SW2) of the special winning opening 2 in this example. If the switch is the count switch SW2, the process proceeds to step S609. If so, the process proceeds to step S615.

  In step S609, 1 is added to the number of entered balls (IN number) for updating, and the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the update result is stored, and the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, it is determined whether there is an undetermined switch among the switches to be determined in which the edge is detected. If there is an undetermined switch, the process proceeds to step S605. If there is no undetermined switch, Proceed to step S621.

  In step S615, since the switch in which the edge is detected is an out switch, the number is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of entered balls, and the process proceeds to step S617. In step S617, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region related passage number is negative. If it is not negative, the process proceeds to step S611. If negative, the process proceeds to step S619. In step S619, the special winning opening exhaust excess abnormality flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S621.

  In step S621, it is determined whether or not the extra prize winning extraordinary abnormality monitoring timer is 0 (not an error). If it is 0 (not an error), the process proceeds to step S623, and if not, the process proceeds to step S625. move on.

  In step S623, an extra prize winning excess abnormality monitoring timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG.

  In step S625, the probability variable region-related passage number updated so far is set, and the process proceeds to step S627. In step S627, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area-related passage number is positive. If not, the process proceeds to step S633. If positive, the process proceeds to step S629 because it is an over-winning abnormality. In step S629, the extra prize winning excess excess flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 20, in step S633, the valid period state of the probability variation area is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S635. In step S635, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation area is set to be valid. If it is set to be valid, the process proceeds to step S637, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S637, a test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric accessory (special electric combination 2) related to the second variable winning award (second attacker) 235 is acquired. The test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric role 2 outputs a test signal for a type test of the gaming machine for a predetermined period after the second variable prize opening (second attacker) 235 is closed (special electric power). This is an information output timer (in this case, for example, 2 seconds) for adding a test signal to the role 2 operating signal.

  In step S639, it is determined whether or not the signal output timer of special electric utility 2 is 0 (if the special electric utility 2 is still valid). If it is 0 (if valid), the process proceeds to step S641. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S643.

  In step S641, the probability variation area release count and the release timer are cleared, the probability variation area state is set to be invalid, and the process ends.

  In step S643, it is determined whether or not an edge of the probability change area switch is detected. If detected, the process proceeds to step S645, and if not detected, the process ends.

  In step S645, after-hit setting data (time reduction, number of probability changes, etc.) is set according to the hit type information. In this step, the status is set according to the hit-medium type information (winning symbol (for example, special figure A, special figure B, etc.)) shown in FIG. For example, the status is status 0 (no setting), status 1 (time reduction 100 times), status 2 (time reduction 50 times), status 3 (probability change 100 times), status 4 (probability change 50 times), etc. In the case of passing, for example, status 4 corresponding to 50 probability changes is set according to the winning symbol.

  In step S647, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the flow advances to step S649. In step S649, a short opening pass flag is set according to the hit type information, and the process ends. The short-opening pass flag is a flag for notifying the store clerk of the passing of the game ball when, for example, the game ball is won in a pattern that is difficult to win.

  In the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 3, for example, there are a count switch SW that detects the number of balls entered in each of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 and an out switch SO that detects the number of discharges. Each one is provided and does not have a probability variation region. As described above, in the case of a model that does not have a probability variation area, processing regarding the probability variation area (probability variation area related setting processing (FIGS. 19 and 20) and probability variation area control processing (FIG. 22) becomes unnecessary. A separate process is required to detect a prize winning outlet excess error and a grand prize winning prize excess error.An example of a process for detecting a prize winning outlet excess error and a prize winning prize excess error is a series of processes shown in FIG. In the processing, the processing may be terminated after step S623, and the processing may be terminated after step S629 (the processing after step S623 shown in FIG. 20 is not executed). As described above, the “probability variation region-related number of passes” may be a number obtained by subtracting the number of balls (the value of the count switch SW) and the number of discharges (the value of the out switch SO). In each processing after 12, processing relating to a solenoid (step) becomes unnecessary.

  <Special status update process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special figure state update process (step S325) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S701, the special figure processing state address is acquired and stored, and the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is “waiting for change”. If it is “waiting for change”, the process proceeds to step S705. If not, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S705, it is determined whether or not the special prize opening excess excess abnormality flag is on. If it is on, the process ends. If it is not on, the process proceeds to step S707. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure processing state is the “waiting for fluctuation” state, that is, only after the symbol stop after the end of the big hit, the big prize opening prize excess abnormality flag is determined. Then, in this step S705, if the big prize opening excess excess abnormality flag is on, the subsequent processing is interrupted.

  In step S707, the special figure processing state before the execution of the process corresponding to the special figure processing state is stored in the buffer, and the process proceeds to step S709.

  In the next step S709, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, a special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A, a process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 26, and a special figure shown in FIG. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start display weight processing shown in FIG. 28, special electric character operation processing shown in FIG. 30, special electric character remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 33, special electric character operation end processing shown in FIG. 34, hit shown in FIG. One of the end display wait processing is executed.

  In the next step S711, a probability variation area control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S713. The probability variation area control process will be described later. In step S713, the special figure high probability status (probability change state) and the special figure change time reduction status at the time of symbol stop (special figure change game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, probability change game state, short time game state and A special figure status is set according to the status) indicating any game state of the latent probability changing game state.

  In step S715, the winning easy status is set to ON. In this step, the easy-to-win status is set according to the open extension status, the usual figure change time reduction status, and the usual figure high probability status. In step S717, the special figure processing state before and after execution of the process according to the special figure processing state is compared, and in the next step S719, the state change of the special figure processing state (the value indicated by the special figure processing state). If there is no change in the state of the special figure processing state (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S719: No), the special figure state update process is performed. When the process is completed and the state of the special figure processing state has changed (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S719: Yes), the process proceeds to step S721.

  In step S721, the initial value of the special figure related timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S723. In step S721, for example, timers updated every 20 ms (4 ms × “5”) (for example, symbol variation time timer, special figure display confirmation timer, hit start display timer, special electric action delay timer, special electric action interval timer) If there is a jackpot end display timer, etc.), the opening time of the attacker is indefinite, so the initial value “5” is reset every time the status of the special figure changes. In the case of a configuration in which all timers are updated every 4 ms, step S721 is an unnecessary process.

  In step S723, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is updated to “waiting for change”. If applicable (step S723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S725, and if not applicable (step S723: No), the process proceeds to step S727. The special figure processing status is managed according to numerical values such as “7” for “hit start display wait status”, “3” for “remaining sphere detection status”, “0” for “waiting for change”, etc. In this step, it is determined whether or not the numerical value has been changed. Note that the special figure processing state does not have to be managed corresponding to the numerical value. In step S725, a variation pattern table is set according to the gaming state and the number of variations, and the process proceeds to step S729.

  In step S727, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “hit start display wait state”. If applicable (step S727: Yes), the process proceeds to step S729. Step S727: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

  In step S729, a sub-command transmission request is set (in this embodiment, after setting a transmission request for a gaming state command including a special figure and a normal gaming state, a firing position including information on whether or not the player is in a right-handed state. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update process is terminated. Note that the order of subcommand transmission requests is not limited to this example, the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or multiple command transmission requests may be performed together in one process, The same applies to subcommand transmission requests in other processing flows.

  <Probability change area control processing>

  Next, the probability variation area control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the probability variation region control process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG.

  In step S801, the state of the probability variation area (valid or invalid) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation area is invalid. If invalid, the process proceeds to step S825, and if not invalid (if valid), the process proceeds to step S805.

  In step S805, a probability variation area solenoid open / close timer is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S807. In step S807, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region solenoid opening / closing timer is operating. If the probability variation region solenoid opening / closing timer is operating, the process is terminated. If the probability variation region solenoid opening / closing timer is not operating, step S809 is performed. Proceed to As an example, when the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening is, for example, opened at an opening time of 500 ms, then closed at a closing time of 2000 ms, and opened at an opening time of 27000 ms, the value of the probability variation area solenoid opening / closing timer is 500 ms, 2000 ms, and 27000 ms. The timing for switching from opening to closing and the timing for switching from closing to opening are timings during which the probability change region solenoid open / close timer is not in operation.

  In step S809, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the number of probability variation operations is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S813. In the above example, the probability variation operation count is 3 (500 ms open, 2000 ms close, 27000 ms open). In step S813, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the probability variation region is a specific number (for example, three times). If it is the specific number, the process proceeds to step S825, and if not, the process proceeds to step S815.

  In step S815, a probability variation area open / close timer is acquired according to the number of times the probability variation area is activated. For example, in the above example, when the number of operations of the probability variation region is “2”, the probability variation region opening / closing timer to be acquired is 2000 ms that is closed.

  In the next step S817, it is determined whether or not the acquired timer is a release timer (a timer including release information, for example, 27000 ms). If it is a release timer, the process proceeds to step S819; ) Proceeds to step S821. In step S819, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to ON, and the flow proceeds to step S821.

  In step S821, the obtained probability variation area opening / closing timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, 1 is added to the probability variation region operation count to update it, and the process ends. In step S825, the probability variation region solenoid signal is set to OFF, and the process ends.

  <Special drawing related lottery processing>

  Next, the special drawing related lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process of FIG.

  This special figure-related lottery process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “waiting for change” in step S709 of the special figure state updating process of FIG. It is.

  In step S901 of the special figure related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S903, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0. In the case of (when there is no special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S903: No), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S905, the number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S907, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls is 0. When there is no variable game hold (step S907: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 1 variable game hold) (step S907: No). In order to execute the process related to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S909, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one. When the process related to special figure 1 is executed, the process is executed in the RAM 308. The stored special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one. In step S911, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 2 to 4 in special figure 2 is stored in 3 is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to 3, and when the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. 1 is cleared. Thus, the game machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine. In addition, each of FIG. 2 and FIG. 1 can store up to 4 holds.

  In step S913, a lottery process per special figure is performed. Although details will be described later, in this special drawing lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is successful is determined. In step S915, display symbol lottery processing is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and based on the result of the lottery processing per special symbol in step S913 and the random number value, the second special symbol is displayed. The lottery of the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  FIG. 25A shows an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 25B shows an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in the step S915, the special symbol 1 lottery process in the step S913 is referred to with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25 (a). Based on the result of the determination in FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the result of special figure 1 is a big hit, one of special figure A and special figure B is selected, and when the result of special figure 1 is lost, the special figure C is selected.

  Further, when the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in the step S915, the special symbol lottery process in the step S913 is referred to with reference to the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. On the basis of the result of the determination of special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number, the display symbol data of special figure 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, special figure a is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, special figure b is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display display setting process (step S335) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined. If the symbol data is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process for setting data to be set at the end of the hit (data setting process after the hit is completed) is performed. The after-hit data setting process is a process for setting a gaming state set after the win according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 23A, in step S917, a special figure fluctuation time lottery process is performed. In the special figure fluctuation time lottery process, a fluctuation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S913 and the numerical value range of the random number value are determined. Then, after selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

  <Lottery processing per special figure>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, the lottery process per special figure (step S913) will be described. FIG. 23B is a flowchart of the lottery process per special figure (step S913) in the special figure-related lottery process of FIG.

  In step S1001 of this special drawing lottery process, a lottery per special drawing is performed with reference to the determination table. In the present embodiment, an example of performing lottery per special figure using the same success / failure determination table for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 will be described. May be prepared.

  FIG. 24A is a diagram showing an example of the high / failure determination probability table, and FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of the low / probability determination probability table. In the lottery process per special figure in step S1001, when the special figure 1 is judged to be true or false, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special decision high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low-probability state, the validity determination low-probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the lottery process per special figure in step S1001, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for determining whether or not it is shown in FIG. In the case of the special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Returning to FIG. 23B, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the result of lottery determination (lottery result) per special drawing in step S1001 is other than “big hit”. If it is not “big hit” (step S1003). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1005, and in the case of “big hit” (step S1003: No), the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1005, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 24C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S1005, the special hitting table shown in FIG. 24C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value, the special figure is determined. Select the result of whether or not to win a small lottery. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 23B, in step S1007, based on the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S1001 or the determination result of lottery (lottery result) of special drawing small lottery in step S1005, the RAM 308 Is set to any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lack”. In the next step S1009, information indicating “Fluctuating special figure” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 26 is called and executed.

  In step S1011, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In the next step S1013, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure change start command) is set. In the next step S1015, the special figure is displayed. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the change is in progress (2) (or special figure 1), the lottery process per special figure is terminated.

  In the special drawing related lottery process, when there is no small hit, the processes in steps S1003 and S1005 are not required.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special symbol determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. The tables shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 24 (a) to 24 (b) are used in the success / failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 24 (a) shows a high probability table for determination of success / failure used in the special figure high probability state, and FIG. 24 (b) shows a low probability table for determination of success / failure used in the special figure low probability state.

  24 (a) and 24 (b), the success / failure determination table includes “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “correction determination result” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column. It consists of items. The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 24A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. In the second column, the “result of judgment” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 11638 are assigned to “high probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 11639 to 65535 are assigned to “high probability” and “out of”.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 24B indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. In the second column, the “result of judgment” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 10162 are assigned to “low probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 10163 to 65535 are assigned to “low probability” and “outlier”.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires the special figure winning that is obtained in order to determine whether the result of the floating game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a win (big hit) or a bad win (loss). The success / failure determination is performed on the random number value using the determination table. For example, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 24A from the ROM 306 when the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, and the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure is special. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 24, the low probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 24B is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 24C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hit lottery process (step S1005) of the special figure lottery process shown in FIG. 23B, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the numerical value range and the acquired random number value, the determination result of special lottery lottery selection is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  FIG. 25 shows a symbol determination table of a special symbol used for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation ends. FIG. 25A shows a special figure 1 symbol determination table. FIG. 25B shows a special figure 2 symbol determination table. In FIG. 25 (a), the special figure 1 symbol determination table is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "stop symbol", and "random number range" from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “big hit” is determined as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B. The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not using the determination table shown in FIG.

  The item “stop symbol” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 25A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Two stop symbol patterns of “special drawing A” and “special drawing B” correspond to the “hit” determination result. Further, the stop symbol form of “special drawing C” corresponds to “displacement”.

  The item “random number range” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 25A indicates a numerical range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 1 random value. Regarding the determination result of “hit”, numerical values 0 to 59 are assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing A”, and numerical values 60 to 99 are assigned to “special drawing B”. A numerical value 0 to 99 of the entire range of random numbers is assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing C” with the determination result of “no match”.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol form of “B” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table with respect to the acquired special figure 1 random value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of “Special Figure C” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on winning in the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. Decide what to do.

  In FIG. 25 (b), the special figure 2 symbol determination table is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "stop symbol", and "random number range" from the left column. In the left column, “results of success / failure determination” is divided into “big hit” and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B. ) Or the result of the determination using the determination table shown in FIG. 24B shows a case where the determination is “displaced”.

  The item “stop symbol” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 25B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The special symbol “a” stop symbol form corresponds to the “hit” determination result. Further, the stop symbol form of “special drawing b” corresponds to “displacement”.

  The item “random number range” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 25B indicates a numerical range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value. Regarding the result of the determination as to whether or not the game is successful, a numerical value 0 to 99 is assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing a”. A numerical value 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers is also assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing b” having a determination result of “no match”.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display a stop symbol form of “special figure a” when the success / failure determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. To stop display. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of “special figure b” on the special figure 2 display device 214 when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. Decide what to do.

  For example, in the case of the special lottery process of FIG. 2 (FIG. 23A), the main control unit 300 starts from the earliest (most recently stored) hold position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. The special figure 2 start information is acquired, and the success / failure shown in FIG. 24 stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc. The determination table is used to determine whether or not to make a big hit and to determine whether or not to lose. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25 (b) stored in the ROM 306 to determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, Using the special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 26) and the timer table (see FIG. 27) stored in the ROM 306, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is determined.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  Further, after the related lottery process of FIG. 2 (FIG. 23A), the related lottery process of FIG. 1 (FIG. 23A) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  <Process during symbol variation>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the symbol variation processing executed in the special symbol state update processing shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol changing process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “Fluctuating special figure” in step 709 of the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. It is processing.

  In step S1101 of the process during symbol variation, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the update target RAM is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S1103, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S1101, the special figure fluctuation time timer set in step S917 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the timer is zero. As a result of the determination, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1109, and if it is not 0 (set special figure fluctuation time) If (No has passed) (step S1103: No), the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special symbol display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S1105: Yes), the symbol variation processing is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S1105: No). ), And proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of Special Figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Change display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S1109, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S915 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A is acquired and set. In the next step S1111, the special figure processing state is set to “special figure display weight”. Information indicating "status" is set. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the special figure display confirmation wait process shown in FIG. 27 is called and executed.

  In step S1113, the display symbol update data is cleared. In the next step S1115, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S <b> 1117, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S1119, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure change stop command) is set to ON, for example, information indicating the type per special figure, the special figure type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Set. In the next step S1121, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, the symbol of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 5 (a), or FIG. ) In the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 9, or the special drawing shown in FIG. 10 (b). 2), and a special symbol display determination timer indicating the time for maintaining the special symbol stop display is set based on the symbol type information, and then the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  <Special figure display confirmation weight processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display determination weight process is called when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure display weight state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process shown in FIG. It is a process to be executed.

  In step S1201 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S1121 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1201: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight process is terminated, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1201: No), step S1203. Proceed to

  In step S1203, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S1117 of the symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 26 is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1205, the special symbol variation time reduction status ( A special figure variable game state (a status indicating a normal game state, a probability variable game state, or a short-time game state in this embodiment) is stored in the RAM 308 as a storage special figure variable time reduction status to be described later. .

  In step S1207, the success / failure determination type set in step S1007 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A is acquired. In the next step S1209, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “big hit”. judge. As a result of the determination, if the success / failure determination type is “big hit” (step S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219. If the correct / failure determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1209: No), the process proceeds to step S1211. Then, the number of time reductions in the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time reduction number is subtracted).

  In step S1213, the success / failure determination type set in step S1007 of the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A is acquired. In the next step S1215, whether or not the acquired determination result type is “small hit”. Determine. As a result of this determination, if the determination type is “small hit” (step S1215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219. If the determination type is other than “small hit” (step S1215: No), step Proceeding to S1217, information indicating "waiting for fluctuation" is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A is called and executed.

  In step S1219, basic signal information (for testing) indicating the special symbol success / failure type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1221, the RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / not-accepting type, the number of times of operation of the special electric character, the number of winnings of the big prize opening (the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235), the operation pattern of the special electric character, the operating state of the special electric character, the total number of winning per hit, In addition to clearing information related to a prize winning abnormality at the big prize opening, winning end display timer type, etc., at the time of big winning, further clear the easy winning status and special figure status.

  In step S1223, information indicating the “hit start display wait state” is set as the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the hit start display wait process shown in FIG. 28 is called and executed. In step S1225, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1227, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit start command) is set to ON, for example, information indicating the type per special figure stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In step S1229, symbol type information is set. In step S1231, a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1229. In step S1233, according to the symbol type information set in step S1229. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait process is terminated.

  <Hit start display weight processing>

  Next, the hit start display weight process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the hit start display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit start display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “winning start display weight state” in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 21). Process.

  In step S1301 of the hit start display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1231 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is greater than zero. If it has not elapsed (step S1301: Yes), the hit start display weight process is terminated. If not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1303. move on.

  In step S1303, after performing a special power combination release process described later, the hit start display wait process is terminated.

  <Special Electricity Release Process>

  Next, the special power release process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the special power release process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process.

  In step S1401 of the special electric character release process, information indicating “special electric character operation state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the special electric character activation process shown in FIG. 30 is called and executed.

  In step S1403, the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control unit winning counter") and the operating state of the special electric role are cleared. In the next step S1405, the probability variation area solenoid is changed. Clear the edge detection count. In the next step S1407, a transmission request for a subcommand (special power release command) is set. Thereby, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. Further, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (big prize opening command) is turned on in this step, for example, the number of big hit rounds (number of special electric utility operations) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the type per special figure Set the information that indicates.

  Note that the main control unit winning counter that is cleared in step S1403 is cleared only of the value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened, of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235. The value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening that is not opened remains maintained. Note that any main control unit winning counter value may be cleared. In step S1409, the symbol type information set in step S1229 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 27 is acquired, and in the next step S1411, the special electric character action pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. To do.

  With reference to FIG. 32, the special electric character operation pattern data table will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-1) to FIG. 32 (a-3), the special electric role operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. FIG. 32 shows only a part of them. The special electric character operation pattern data table stores special electric character operation data indicating opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 for each round. As shown in FIG. 32 (b-1) to FIG. 32 (b-3), the special electric combination operation data includes information indicating the open / closed state of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 (open timer pattern, One or a plurality of timer pattern data including a closed timer pattern) and information on a time for maintaining the open state or the closed state (special power combination opening / closing timer) are stored. As a result, various variations can be given to the opening / closing operations of the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of big hit with the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), in the 1R to 15R, the special electric utility operation data 1 shown in FIG. 32 (b-1) is referred. After the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished. Is done. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are configured to be alternately opened for each round.

  Also, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-2), in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, 10R to 15R, the above-mentioned special electric charge operation The data 1 is referred to perform the above-described operation, while the 5R and 9R eyes are referred to the special electric charge operation data 4 shown in FIG. 32 (b-3) to open / close the first variable winning opening 234. Operation is controlled. That is, in the 5R and 9R, after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1 first, the first variable winning opening 234 is kept closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 Is executed four times, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and then the first variable prize opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished. The

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-3), in the first to fourth rounds, the above-mentioned special electric power operation data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5R to 15R, the special electric combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 32B-2 is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is controlled. . That is, in the 5R to 15R, after the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the first variable winning opening 234 (first 2 variable prize winning opening 235) is kept closed for 2820 ms, and then the first variable prize winning opening 234 (second variable winning prize opening 235) is kept closed by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation ends. Controlled. Note that another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1413, the number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is acquired, and in step S1415, the acquired number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1417, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations of the special power combination (number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1419, a special power control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1421, a test signal output timer (test signal output timer) is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1423. The test signal output timer may become 0 during the round, but when the test signal output timer becomes 0, the test signal may be turned off and the signal may not be output as it is. For example, if the same attacker is released twice in the test signal output timer, the output signal is turned off even though the attacker is open. In order to prevent such an event, the test signal output timer is set to 0 in step S1421. The test signal output timer performs a process of turning off the test signal when it becomes 0 (1 → 0) in the timer update process (step S311) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. ing. That is, by clearing the test signal output timer in step S1421, the test signal is not turned off in the timer update process (step S311).

  In step S1423, after the special electric winning combination detection timer is cleared, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of special electric utility operations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1427. In step S1427, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area is a round to be released. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1429. If not (the probability variation area is not a round to be released), the process is terminated.

  In step S1429, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region solenoid is open. If it is open, the process proceeds to step S1431, and if not, the process ends. In step S1429, if the probability variation region solenoid is already open at the time when the round is started (when the special power release process is started), it is determined as abnormal.

  In step S1431, the probability variation region solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the special power combination release process is terminated. In the above-described special power release process flow, when there is one attacker, step S1421 and step S1423 are not required.

  <Special Electric Acting Processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special electric power actuating process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric actor operation process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special electric actor operation state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process shown in FIG. It is processing.

  In step S1501 of the special electric player operation process, the maximum number of winning attackers to be released this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1503, the number of winning attackers to be released this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1505, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If the number is smaller (if the number of winnings <the maximum number of winnings) (step S1505). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1507, and if not (the number of wins> = the maximum number of wins) (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1513.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open, that is, the special electric power action pattern being executed (open timer pattern or closed timer pattern) set in step S1417 of the special electric character release process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the special power combination opening / closing timer corresponding to is other than 0. If the special power combination opening / closing timer is other than 0 (when the special power combination opening / closing timer has not elapsed) (step S1507: Yes), the special power combination operation process is terminated. If not (when the special power combination opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1507: No), the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1511, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired, and the closing timer pattern in the acquired special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is referred to. It is determined whether or not it is operating (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is being operated (when the closing timer pattern is not set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: Yes), the special power combination operation processing is terminated. When the special power combination is not operating (when the closing timer pattern is set to information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: No), the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1513, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thus, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 33 is called and executed.

  In step S1515, a special power combination operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. The special electric function operating interval timer is the interval between the last closing of the attacker in a round (the winning prize solenoid stops driving) and the end of the round (until the special electric actor related to the attacker finishes operating). (For example, 100 ms, 20 ms, etc.) or a predetermined timer regardless of the attacker. Note that the timer may be different depending on the opening pattern of the attacker, may be different depending on the opened attacker, or may be different depending on the jackpot symbol.

  In step S1517 following step S1515, a transmission request for a subcommand (large winning opening closing command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (big prize closing command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the number of big hit rounds, the type per special figure, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. .

  In the next step S1519, an information output timer (for example, 2 seconds) of the special power information signal (test signal) is set, and the process proceeds to step S1521.

  In step S1521, the special electric prize winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric prize winning detection timer refers to the big winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235 after the large winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235) is closed. ) Is a timer for effectively detecting the game balls remaining inside. In step S1523, after setting the drive signal (large winning port solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning ports (first variable winning port 234 and second variable winning port 235) to OFF, The operation process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are in the easy-to-enter state, the maximum number of winning game balls has passed to the passing area. In addition, it functions as an example of a variable winning means that changes to a difficult entry state.

  <Special electric control process>

  Next, the special power combination control process (step S1419 in FIG. 29, step S1509 in FIG. 30) executed in the special power release process (FIG. 29) and the special power action operation process (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to FIG. To do. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a special power combination control process executed in the special power combination release process and the special power action operation process.

  In step S1601, special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, among the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, the special power combination operation data read and set in step S1417 of the special power combination release process (FIG. 29), the operation pattern to be executed this time is set. Get control data. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric combination indicated in the special electric combination operation data 1 is set and the round starts, the “open timer pattern 2 shown in“ (1) ”of FIG. ”Is acquired. In addition, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 32B-1 is completed, the “closing timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. The control data of “Pattern 3” is acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1603, opening / closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234, second variable winning opening 235) based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric role. To get. For example, if it is an “open timer pattern”, data (open information) for opening the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is acquired. Data (closing information) for closing the winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is acquired. In the present embodiment, the odd variable round is a round in which the first variable winning opening 234 can be opened, and the even round is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 can be opened.

  In step S1605, a special electric combination opening / closing timer is acquired based on the control data of the special electric combination operation pattern acquired in step S1601 and the open / close information acquired in step S1603. For example, when “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the open / close information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S <b> 1607, information indicating acceptance is set in the special power combination winning / prohibiting state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special electric winning combination winning / rejecting state is acceptable is set, a ball detection sensor (a count switch SW1 of the first variable winning opening 234 or a second variable winning opening 235) provided in the variable winning opening. Can be accepted and information indicating that acceptance is not possible is set, a ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 or count switch SW2) in which a game ball is provided in the variable winning opening Passing through will be invalid. Here, only the count switch corresponding to the variable winning opening to be opened out of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is set to be acceptable. In step S1609, a special power combination information signal (test signal) is set. In step S1611, the number of special power combination operations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1613. In step S1613, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area is a round to be released. If the round is to be released, the process proceeds to step S1615, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1615, the state of the probability variation area is set to be valid, and the process proceeds to step S1617.

  In step S1617, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. Specifically, only the big winning hole solenoid bits corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are cleared, and drive data is set for the driven big winning solenoid bits. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S337) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In step S1619, the special power combination opening / closing timer of the special power combination opening / closing timer is set, and then the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1605 is set.

  <Special Electricity Residual Sphere Detection Processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special electric power remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric character remaining sphere detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the “remaining sphere detection state” in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 21). Process.

  In step S1701 of the special electric charge remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special electric charge operation interval timer set in step S1515 of the special electric charge operation process shown in FIG. 30 is in operation. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S1701: Yes), the special electric combination remaining sphere detection process is terminated. If not (the special electric combination operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1701: No). The process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, the special electric utility operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1705, information indicating the “special electric utility operation end state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 21), the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 34 is called and executed. That is, it becomes a state of the interval between rounds.

  In the present embodiment, the period set by the special electric utility operation delay timer is the interval period between rounds. The period set by the special power combination operation delay timer means that when there is one attacker (variable winning opening 234), the special electric combination (special electric combination) related to the variable winning opening 234 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is a period from the time when the special power role is changed from the inactive state to the active state in the next round.

  In addition, for example, when there are a first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235, and both of them open and close alternately every round, the special electric accessory (special electric combination 1) related to the first variable winning opening 234 is provided. This is a period from the time when the operating state is changed to the non-operating state until the special electric combination (special electric combination 2) related to the second variable prize opening 235 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round.

  In step S1707, after the special power combination information signal (test signal) is cleared, the special power combination remaining ball detection process is terminated. Note that a transmission request for a subcommand (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special power combination information signal.

  <Special electric utility operation end processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric utility operation end process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special electric utility operation end state” in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 21). Process.

  In step S1801 of the special power combination operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1703 of the special power combination remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 33 is in operation. Step S1801: Yes), the special power combination operation end process is terminated. If not (when the special power operation delay timer is 0) (step S1801: No), the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the number of special electric charge activations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area is a round to be released. If it is a round to be released, the process proceeds to step S1807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the opening of the probability variation region solenoid has been detected once. If not, the process proceeds to step S1809. If not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1809, a probability variation region solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S1811.

  In step S1811, symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special figure win / rejection type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1811: Yes), the small hit is handled in step S1813. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1823. On the other hand, if the special figure win / loss type is not a small hit (step S1811: No), the process proceeds to step S1815, and a predetermined number of times for the maximum winning opening stored in the RAM 308 (for example, “8” in the case of 8R, In the case of 16R, “16” or the like) is set. In step S1817, the maximum winning opening number of special winning openings is compared with the number of opening special electric roles, and it is determined whether or not the number of opening special electric roles is smaller than the maximum opening number of large winning openings, that is, whether or not the winning is not completed. . When the winning is not finished (step S1817: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1819 to execute the above-mentioned special electric character release process (FIG. 29), and the special electric character operation end process is ended. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the winning is over (step S1817: No), the process proceeds to step S1821.

  In step S1821, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired. In step S1823, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1813 or step S1821 is set. In step S1825, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 35 is called and executed. In step S1827, a transmission request for a subcommand (a hit end command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit end command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the type per special figure stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine having a first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 (for example, pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 3), in the case of 15 rounds (15R) big hit, an attacker (for example, the first When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric power actuating interval timer elapses after the variable winning opening 234) is finally closed (the solenoid for the first variable winning opening 234 stops driving) The special electric combination (for example, special electric combination 1) is not activated and 14R ends. Then, after the time set by the special power actor operation delay timer (for example, 1 s) has elapsed after 14R has ended, the special electric utility (for example, the special power utility) related to the 15R attacker (for example, the second variable prize opening 235). 2) is activated, the attacker opens (open / close operation starts) and 15R starts. Then, when the time set by the special electric function operating interval timer has elapsed since the last time the attacker (for example, the second variable winning opening 235) was closed at 15R, the special electric accessory (for example, special electric utility 2) related to the attacker has elapsed. When the time set by the special electric utility operation delay timer elapses after the operation becomes inoperative and 15R ends, the time of the hit end display timer set in the above step S1823 elapses, and the next processing (FIG. The special electric utility operation end process shown) is executed.

  In the case of 16 round (16R) big hit, for example, after the attacker (for example, the first variable winning port 234) is finally closed in 15R (the solenoid for the first variable winning port 234 stops driving). When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electric combination (for example, special power combination 1) related to the attacker becomes inoperative and 15R ends. When the time set by the special power function activation delay timer (for example, 1 s) elapses after 15R is completed, the special electric power tool (for example, the special power function) related to the 16R attacker (for example, the second variable prize opening 235). 2) is activated, and the attacker opens (open / close operation starts) and 16R starts. Then, in 16R, when the time set by the special electric function activation interval timer has elapsed since the last time the attacker (for example, the second variable prize opening 235) was closed, the special electric accessory (for example, special electric utility 2) related to the attacker has passed. When the time set by the special electric utility operation delay timer elapses after the operation becomes inoperative and 16R ends, after the time of the hit end display timer set in step S1823 above elapses, the next processing (FIG. The special electric utility operation end process shown) is executed.

  If there is no small hit, the processes in steps S1811 and S1813 are not executed.

  <Hit end display weight processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “hit end display wait state” in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 21). Process.

  In step S1901 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1823 of the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 34 is in operation (step S1901). : Yes), the winning end display weight process is terminated. If not (No at Step S1901), the process proceeds to Step S1903. In step S1903, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1905, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 23A is called and executed.

  In steps S1909 to S1913, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winning prizes are cleared. In step S1915, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1917, it is determined whether or not the small hit is completed. If the small hit is completed (step S1917: Yes), the winning end display weight process is performed. If the process ends, and the process ends with other than the small hit (when the process ends with a big hit) (step S1917: No), the process proceeds to step S1919.

  In step S1919, after-hit end setting data (probability change, time reduction, hidden probability change) is acquired, and in step S1921, data corresponding to the setting data after hitting end (probability change status (special figure probability state status, general figure probability state status)) , Time reduction (Special figure fluctuation time reduction fluctuation frequency, Fluctuation time correction fluctuation frequency, Easy winning status fluctuation frequency), Time reduction status (Special figure fluctuation time reduction status, Normal figure fluctuation time reduction status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery In addition to setting the status (information for determining the fluctuation time lottery table, etc.) and clearing the setting data after the end of hitting, the hitting end display weight processing is terminated. The transmission request flag may be turned on, and the subcommand in this case is a hit end command. In the present embodiment, it may be a by which) to turn on the transmission request flag in electrically movable device control officers operating end process may be a sub-command indicating that per end effect is completed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  <Device monitoring processing>

  Next, the device monitoring process (step S329) executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the device monitoring process.

  First, in step S2001, the big prize opening excess excess abnormality flag is acquired and set in the error information, and the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, a probability variation region solenoid abnormality flag is acquired and set in error information.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not an impact is detected while the state of the probability variation area is valid. If an impact is detected, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2007, an impact abnormality flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2009, the impact abnormality flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In this way, even if an impact is detected during symbol variation, it is not output as an error (clears the impact abnormality flag), and an error is output when an impact is detected only when the probability variation area is valid (the impact abnormality flag is set). To do.

  In step S2010, the shock abnormality flag is acquired and the shock abnormality error information is set to “current error information”. In the next step S2011, the magnetic detection abnormality flag is acquired and the magnetic detection error information is set to “current error information”. In step S2012, the magnetic field detection abnormality flag is acquired and the magnetic field detection error information is set to “current error information”. In next step S2013, other error flags are acquired and other error information is set. “Current error information” is set, and the process proceeds to step S2014.

  In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the error command transmission timer is 0 (the transmission cycle timing has been reached). If it is 0 (transmission cycle timing), the process proceeds to step S2015; If the cycle timing is not output), the process proceeds to step S2017.

  In step S2015, “error information” is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S2016. Here, in “error information”, “current error information” set in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) for one transmission period (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). In step S2018, which will be described later, all “current error information” stored in “error information” is initialized (cleared) in this step.

  In step S2016, an initial value is set in the error command transmission timer. As an example, when the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms with a transmission period of 100 ms, “25 (= 100/4)” is set as the initial value. In step S2017, the error information for the security signal is set to “current error information”, and the process proceeds to step S2018.

  In step S2018, “current error information” is set to “error information”. In step S2018, error information corresponding to the error information detected in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) for one transmission period (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). Specifically, each “current error information” set in steps S2010 to S2013 includes “0” when no error is detected (when the error is canceled) and “1” when an error is detected. Is set (updated) as needed. In step S2018, the logical sum of these “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information”.

  In step S2019, it is determined whether or not the magnetic detection abnormality flag is on (is set). If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2021, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2021, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

  In step S2023, it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the error command. If it is the transmission timing, the process proceeds to step S2025. If it is not the transmission timing, the process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the magnetic detection error is output without determining the transmission timing of the error command, but other than the magnetic detection error is output at every transmission timing of the error command.

  In step S2025, it is determined whether or not the previously stored “error information” matches the “error information” set in step S2018 this time. If they match, the process ends. If they do not match, step S2027 is determined. Proceed to In step S2027, the current “error information” is stored in the previous “error information” buffer, and the process proceeds to step S2029. In step S2029, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

  In the above processing flow, since the logical sum of “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information” in step S2018, an error is detected in any of steps S2010 to S2013. Then, when each error is canceled, the “current error information” of each error is updated from “1” to “0” as needed, but once “1” is set in “error information”. After that, even if the error is canceled, “1” remains. In this case, when a subcommand (error command) is transmitted regardless of the transmission timing of the error command (in the case of a magnetic detection error, etc.), a subcommand for canceling the error is transmitted, but the subcommand is transmitted at each transmission cycle timing. When an (error command) is transmitted (in the case of an impact abnormality error or the like), the error canceling subcommand is not transmitted.

  Therefore, in step S2014, when it is the timing of the transmission cycle (when the determination result is “Yes”), “error information” is initialized in step S2015, and the error is canceled at the timing of the transmission cycle. If this happens, the error canceling subcommand is transmitted.

  <External output signal management processing>

  Next, the external output signal management process (step S331) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal management process.

  In the external output signal management process, external terminal board signals 1 to 12 (see FIG. 38, details will be described later) are set and output. External terminal board signals transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 are transmitted to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via a data display or the like (not shown), and collected and managed by the external device.

  In step S2101, security information signal output setting processing is performed. In this security information signal output setting process, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is detected when the power is turned on or when an illegal action (for example, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error, a big error) is detected. Set for output.

  For example, when a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is occurring (that is, when a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is detected and an error flag is set in the device monitoring process of step S2012 in FIG. 36), FIG. Each time the main controller timer interruption process shown is executed, this step is executed in the external output signal management process in step S331, and the external terminal board signal 10 (indicating that a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error has been detected. (Security information signal) is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  On the other hand, when a magnetic detection error is occurring (that is, when a magnetic detection error is detected and an error flag is set in the device monitoring process in step S2011 in FIG. 36), a magnetic field detection error is detected immediately after detection. In the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), this step is executed in the external output signal management process in step S331, and an external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that a magnetic detection error has been detected is output. In the next main control unit timer interrupt process, the determination in step S309 results in Yes, and the processes from step S311 to step S337 are skipped. That is, when a magnetic detection error is occurring, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error has been detected continues to be output until, for example, a power interruption state occurs.

  In the next step S2103, a symbol determination number information signal output setting process is performed. In this symbol determination number information signal output setting process, setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 3 (the symbol determination number information signal) when the variation of the special symbol stops.

  In the next step S2105, out-sphere information signal output setting processing is performed. In this out sphere information signal output setting process, setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 11 (out sphere information signal) when the total number of passages to the out port 240 becomes 10 or more. In the next step S2107, a firing position setting process is performed. In this launch position setting process, it is determined whether or not the electric support is in progress, or whether it is in a right-handed state, and in either case, it is in a right-handed state (otherwise, it is left-handed) Information to be displayed is set, and a process for transmitting the information to a test fire test signal or a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

  In the next step S2109, trial test signal setting processing is performed. In the test firing test setting process, a signal to be output to a test engine device (a signal during a big hit, an accessory continuous operation signal, etc.) is set.

  In the next step S2111, jackpot information signal output setting processing is performed. In this jackpot information signal output setting processing, jackpot information signals (external terminal board signal 4 (big jack 1 information signal), external terminal board signal 5 (big jack 2 information signal), external terminal board signal 6 (big jack 3 information signal)) Clear (initialize) and set the jackpot information signal. In this big hit information signal setting, in the case of big hit by the big hit symbol, the setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 4 (big hit one information signal). , Set to output the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), and output the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal) when the special electric accessory is operating due to the small hit design Set up to do.

  In this step, other information signals are set. The other information signal is, for example, a prize ball information signal (external terminal board signal 1) output from the payout control unit 600, a door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2), or another information signal (external terminal board signal 12). ) Is set. In step S2113, an external output signal setting process is performed, and the external terminal board signal set in the processes so far is output to the outside via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 4). Then, the external output signal management process is terminated.

  <External terminal board signal>

  Next, the external terminal board signal output to the outside by the pachinko machine 100 via the external terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing signal numbers, signal names, and output conditions of external terminal board signals.

  The external terminal plate 349 (see FIG. 4) has a plurality of (in this example, 12) input ports (inputs) that can receive external terminal plate signals output from the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100. Terminal) and a plurality of (in this example, 12) output ports (output terminals) capable of outputting an external terminal board signal to an external device (for example, hall computer) of the pachinko machine 100.

  In this example, the external terminal board 349 is a board that relays a signal to the external apparatus, but control for controlling transmission (output) of the signal to the external apparatus by reception (input) of the external terminal board signal. It may be a means. The input port (input terminal) and output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 may be input / output ports (input / output terminals).

  The pachinko machine 100 can output 12 types of external terminal board signals assigned with numbers 1 to 12 through the external terminal board 349. For example, the external terminal board signal 1 is a signal output by the payout control unit 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the payout of 10 game balls is detected at the time of a winning ball. And output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device. The external terminal board signal 2 is a signal output by the dispensing control unit 600, and is input to an input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected. And output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device.

  On the other hand, the external terminal plate signals 3 to 11 are signals output from the main control unit 300, and are input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 when the output condition shown in FIG. The signal is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device. For example, the external terminal board signal 3 is output when the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, and the external terminal board signal 4 is output when the big hit by the big hit symbol is being performed. The external terminal number 10 is a security information signal, and is output when the power is turned on or when an illegal act is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700). Other external terminal board signals are as shown in the figure.

  The external terminal board signal 12 is a signal that the main controller 300 outputs as necessary. When a condition other than the above (other conditions) is satisfied, information other than the above is input to the external terminal board 349. It is input to the port (input terminal) and output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 to the outside. Further, the external terminal board signal 12 may be the same signal (with the same output conditions) as any of the external terminal numbers 3 to 11.

  <Error notification / Errors that can be detected by the main controller>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, start opening 2 (electrical chew), large winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning outlet exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error, and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on), and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). It is an error that returns when the error occurs. Switch (sensor) disconnection error is caused when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and any of the special figure 1 or 2 start port, normal start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (the harness is disconnected or the connector is disconnected) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (Special Figure 1 and 2 start port, general start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) This error is returned when it is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave).

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when a normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 3) is not activated, and an error of the big prize opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the big winning award (for example, the first variable winning award 234 and the second variable winning award 235 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value.

  The big prize exit excess error occurs when the number of discharges is greater than the number of entries during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer that has generated a large prize exit excess error This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The extra prize winning error is generated when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric utility operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered is equal to the number of balls discharged. This error returns when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the return process for the extra prize winning prize excess error, the number of passes related to the probability variation area is set to zero.

  The impact abnormality error is a predetermined state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and the probability variation area (specific area) is valid. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes outside the probability variation region validity period and outside the probability variation region validity period.

  Solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has never performed an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF during the probability variation area valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 39 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (not playable). Other errors may be top-priority errors, although less frequently. The details of the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. The term “when the winning end display period ends” of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended.

  <Errors that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the dispensing control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a tray full tank error (bottom full container error, dish full tank error), an insufficient number of dispensed errors, an dispensed number switch error, an unauthorized dispensing error, an excessive dispensing Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are a magnetic abnormality error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, an impact sensor error, etc. (not shown).

  Moreover, each error occurrence condition, return condition, payout operation in the payout device 152, and fire operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. Note that “stop” described in the item “stop firing” shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  FIG. 40B is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and enters the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

  <Error notification / other examples>

  The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch non-connection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, (Payout control communication error, switch level error error, winning rate error error, door open error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, or the priority may be the same.

  In addition, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, an operation of a magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), and only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) may be overwritten and others One or a plurality of devices may continue notification for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

  <Specific example of error notification / notification mode>

  Next, a specific example of an error notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) errors related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) errors related to power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) warnings related to sub-controls (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

  <Specific example of error notification / notification mode / payout error>

  First, an error related to payout will be described. In this example, “error related to payout (payout control unit 600)” includes a tray full tank error (hereinafter also referred to as a “plate full tank error”), a glass frame open error, a payout shortage error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, A payout number switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit unconnected error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error can be mentioned.

  In this example, when an underfill full tank error occurs, the number “2” is applied to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the under-plate full error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to the effect that an underfill full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper tray 126 (one storage tray), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper tray 126 is full. .

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Flashing of the frame lamp or panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sounding of a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  When a door opening error occurs, the number “1” is set on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification by the first light emitting means is performed, and notification by the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame Flashing lamps and panel lamps), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by the display means) of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the game ball payout may be interrupted, and the game ball payout may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  Further, when a payout number shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in this example) (lighting LED for payout illumination is turned on in this example). Note that other error notification modes relating to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / power supply error>

  Next, an error relating to the power supply will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error relating to the power supply occurs, error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to main control>

  Next, errors relating to main control and the like will be described. In this example, “error related to main control (main control unit 300)” includes magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, shock error Examples include errors, winning rate abnormality errors, winning prize excess winning errors, winning prize exhaust excess errors, solenoid error errors (large winning mouth error errors).

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) Flashing of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetism (magnet) detection error has occurred), and sound output means ( In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example) is performed by the speaker 120). In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, when an abnormal impact error has occurred, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Notification (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an abnormal shock error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Further, when an error in excess of winning a prize opening occurs, notification by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that a big prize opening excess error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, a notification is made by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to indicate that an extra prize winning prize excess error has occurred).

  In addition, when a big prize outlet discharge excess error occurs, error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notifications (light emitting means (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps)) (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps flashing)) and display means ( In this example, a notification (displaying characters indicating that a big prize mouth discharge excess error has occurred in this example) by a decorative symbol display device 208) and a notification (in this example, a speaker 120) by a notification (this example) Then, a sound effect sound indicating that an extra prize exit excess error has occurred may be performed.

  In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (a special prize opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification (in this example, a decoration LED (decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used. Blinking of the frame lamp and the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred), and sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Note that an error relating to main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) ), Notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. Note that other error notification modes relating to the main control, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to sub-control>

  Next, errors relating to sub-control will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the sub-control (the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500)” in this example include an impact warning and a hitting warning. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, notification (in this example, display of characters indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). No notification will be made.

  Further, when a hitting warning is generated, notification (display of characters indicating that a hitting warning has occurred in this example) by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and sound output means ( In this example, a notification is made by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a strike warning has occurred), but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  <Example of timing chart and presentation display of signals related to magnetic field (radio wave) error>

  Next, an example of a timing chart of signals related to errors and an effect display in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, FIG. 42 relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and relates to the transmission cycle T, the first error (magnetic field detection error) flag, the security information signal, and the first sub-information. It is an example of the timing chart of the alerting | reporting of the 1st error (magnetic field detection error) in the control part 400. FIG. As described above, the security information signal is a signal that is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 and output from the output port (external terminal number 10) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device. Thus, the signal is output when the power is turned on or when an illegal act is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor).

  This example shows a case where the cycle starts after the device command transmission timer (transmission cycle T) is set in the first device monitoring process after power-on shown in FIG. Note that the timing at which the cycle is started may be another timing. For example, the cycle may be started from the first timer update processing after power-on, and the next timer interrupt that has passed through the sub control activation wait wait processing. You may start from the time of a process start. Further, the cycle may start in the middle of the sub control activation wait process (step S341) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15, for example, in the sub control activation wait process, the first sub control unit In order to wait for the 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control start wait counter is decremented by 1, and when this start wait counter reaches 0, preparation for sending a predetermined command is made. As an example here, one sub-control start waiting counter may be subtracted in the first main control unit timer interrupt process after power-on. Alternatively, it may be started from the first subcommand management process after power-on. Note that one cycle of the transmission cycle T is, for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts).

  In the figure, timings a, c, e, and g are timings for ending / starting the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main control unit 300, respectively. First, when the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic field detection error (first error) at a timing in the middle of the first transmission cycle T shown in the figure, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on at timing b. When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, an error detection subcommand transmission request (flag) is set in the device monitoring process (step S329) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 (the device shown in FIG. 36). In step S2029 of the monitoring process and the subcommand management process of the main control unit timer interrupt process (step S333), the subcommand of the magnetic field detection error is set in the transmission buffer and transmitted to the first subcontrol unit 400. There is a time lag between the detection of each error detection switch (various sensors 320) and the main control unit 300 determining that an error has occurred.

  As described above, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on within the transmission period T (within the same interrupt process) in which the magnetic field detection error is detected.

  Then, at the timing d of the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) after the timing a has elapsed, error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started. The error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is executed at any time in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 that is performed after the interruption process with the magnetic field detection error flag set is completed. The time lag until the main control unit 300 transmits an error command to the first sub-control unit 400 and the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the command and displays / outputs on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. Time lag has occurred.

  Timing f is a timing at which the magnetic field detection error is turned off. There is a time lag until the main control unit 300 determines that the error has been canceled. Timing h is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error cancellation command.

  When the magnetic field detection error is turned off at timing f, an error cancellation subcommand (error cancellation command) is set in the transmission buffer in the subcommand management process (step S333) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the first sub It is transmitted to the control unit 400. In this way, in the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) next to the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) when the magnetic field detection error is turned off, the first sub control unit 400 receives the error cancellation command.

  Timing i is a timing at which the security information signal is turned off. The security information signal is turned off when a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interruption) has elapsed since the magnetic field detection error flag was turned off at timing f. Note that the security information signal may be turned off when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of output (timing b). Further, the security information signal may be turned off within the same interrupt in which the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off.

  Timing j is timing when the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 ends. The error notification of the magnetic field detection ends after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnetic field detection is performed except for the time lag until the error cancellation command of the magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the processing time lag in the first sub control unit 400. When the error is canceled (timing f), the error notification may be immediately terminated. Further, the end timing of the error notification may be varied depending on the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, etc., or all may be the same.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of effect display for notifying a magnetic field detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure (for example, special figure 1) is stopped. The symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and a stop symbol of detachment is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights three LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 hold is three. Both the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are turned on, and it is informed that both the special figure 2 and the ordinary figure holdings are 0. Further, the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082 which indicate that the special figure changing game is in progress (the special figure is changing) are both turned off. In addition, in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, which is a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the reduced decorative design display area 208h, the same decorative design (for example, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”) as the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 2 (2), one hold of special figure 1 is consumed, and a special figure variable game using a special figure display device (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) by main controller 300 starts. It is in a state. In addition, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082 (in this example, the special symbol 1 variation) suggesting that the special symbol variable game is being performed (the special symbol is being varied). The 4th symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1 indicating that the game is in progress (during the fluctuation of special figure 1) has started blinking the LED). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs stop display of the decorative symbol, but in the reduced display area 208h, the decorative symbol variable display has started.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 3 (3) to (4) are states in which the decorative symbol variation display has started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In addition, an effect display corresponding to the gaming state (in this case, the display of the character (dono) and “Echigoya Land?”) Has started to be displayed in front of the decorative symbol variation display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is the timing when the magnetic field detection error is detected in the main control unit 300 and the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on (timing b in FIG. 42). Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (dono) and “Echigoya Lando”). Is displayed continuously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (6) is a state in which error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started during the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) when a magnetic field detection error is detected ((timing d in FIG. 42). At this timing, an error display E1 (in this case, the display of the characters “Radio wave detected”) is displayed on the forefront of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify a magnetic detection error. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (dono) and “Echigoya Lando”). Is displayed continuously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 is a state in which error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 changing game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display changing display on the decorative design display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (donor)) Is running continuously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8) is a state in which error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but at a timing when the magnetic field detection error is turned off (timing f in FIG. 42). is there. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 changing game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display changing display on the decorative design display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (donor)) Is running continuously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is, for example, immediately before the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 ends in the state where the hold is further digested and the next variable game is being performed (timing j in FIG. 42). The timing immediately before. At this timing, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative symbol fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game An effect display corresponding to the state (in this case, display of a character (princess)) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 is the timing at which the error notification (error display E1) by the first sub-control unit 400 ends (after timing j in FIG. 42). This timing is after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f in FIG. 42), and the error display E1 is not displayed. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the decoration display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, display of the character (princess)) Is continuing.

  FIG. 44 is another example of the timing chart shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 44 (a) is an example of a timing chart when an error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 44 (b) shows magnetic detection. It is an example of a timing chart when an error and an error relating to the other main control unit 300 and the like occur in an overlapping manner.

  First, referring to FIG. 44A, when main controller 300 detects a magnetic field detection error at a timing in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, a magnetic field detection error flag and a security information signal at timing b of the next transmission cycle T. Is turned on. In this example, the magnetic field detection error is turned off at the timing f within the same transmission cycle T when the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on.

  In this way, when the magnetic field detection error flag changes between on and off within the same (one) transmission cycle T, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at timing c when the next transmission cycle T is reached. The command transmission preparation (command transmission preparation for error notification of magnetic detection error) based on the above is performed, and the error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started at timing d within the transmission cycle T. Then, at the timing g when the next transmission cycle T is reached, a command transmission preparation based on the magnetic detection error flag being turned off (command transmission preparation for canceling the error of the magnetic detection error) is performed. The error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 ends at timing h.

  When the magnetic field detection error flag changes from on to off to on in the same transmission cycle T, when the next transmission cycle T is reached, the command transmission preparation based on the fact that the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (magnetic) Prepare for command transmission based on the fact that the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off even when the next transmission period T is reached (preparation for command transmission for canceling error of magnetic detection error). ) And the magnetic field detection error flag is considered to be on.

  Further, when the magnetic field detection error flag changes from on-> off-> on-> off within the same transmission cycle T, the same processing as in FIG.

  When the magnetic field detection error flag changes from on to off to on in the same transmission cycle T, the command based on the on / off state of the magnetic field detection error flag, as in FIG. Preparation for transmission may be performed.

  Referring to FIG. 44 (b), a magnetic detection error (first error) and other errors relating to the main control unit 300, etc. (third error, for example, a prize winning excess prize error or a prize winning entry) An example of a timing chart of a first error flag, a first error notification, a third error flag, a third error notification, and a security information signal when an excessive discharge error occurs) will be described. .

  If the error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) of the first error and the security information signal are turned on based on detection of the first error (magnetic detection error) at timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the next transmission At the timing d of the period T, error notification of the first error by the first sub control unit 400 is started.

  When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error is completed at the timing i after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

  On the other hand, when the error flag of the third error is turned on based on detection of the third error at timing k in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the first sub-control unit at timing m of the next transmission cycle T Error notification of the third error by 400 is started.

  When the error flag of the third error is turned off at timing n, an error notification of the third error is issued at timing r after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the third error (timing n). finish.

  In this example, the security information signal is turned on at timing b (timing when the first error flag is turned on), and is kept on until it is turned off at timing q. Since there is only one security information signal, it cannot be output in correspondence with each error (first error and third error). In this way, when errors relating to the main control unit 300 etc. (first error and third error) are detected in duplicate, the security information signal is turned on when the error is first detected and finally released. Is turned off at a timing when a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupt) has elapsed from the timing of releasing the error (timing when the error flag is turned off). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the security information signal is a fixed period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500%) from the timing n when the error flag of the last error to be cleared (third error) is turned off. Turn off at the timing q when the Note that the security information signal may be turned on at the same time (timing b) when the error flag of the first error is turned on, and the security information signal may be turned off when 30 seconds have elapsed from the turning on.

  FIG. 45 is an example of a timing chart in the case where a magnetic detection error and other errors related to payout (for example, an underfill full error, a glass frame open error, a payout excess error, etc.) are duplicated.

  Referring to FIG. 45, the main control unit when a magnetic detection error (first error) and other payout errors (third error, for example, glass frame opening error) occur in duplicate. 300, subcommand transmission cycle T1, first error flag, first error notification, security information signal, front frame door opening sensor 109 (door SW), payout command transmission cycle T2 in payout control unit 600, third It is an example of a timing chart of an error flag (glass opening error flag), a third error notification (door opening error notification), and a door opening information signal.

  Timings a, c, g, l, v, and o are timings for ending / starting the subcommand transmission period T1 in the main control unit 300, and timings A, B, k, C, n, D, and E are The timing is the end / start timing of the payout command transmission cycle T2 in the payout control unit 600, respectively.

  When the first error error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) and the security information signal are turned on based on detection of the first error (magnetic detection error) at timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T1, the next transmission is performed. At the timing d of the cycle T1, the first sub controller 400 starts error notification of the first error.

  When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error is completed at the timing i after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

  On the other hand, when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame at the timing s in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T2 (door SW opening). The door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2) is output (turned on) at the timing u of the next transmission cycle T2. As described above, the door opening information signal is a signal output by the dispensing control unit 600 when the opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal plate 349. And output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device.

  When the door opening information signal is turned on, the third error flag (door opening error flag) is turned on at the timing k of the next transmission cycle T2. Then, the third error notification (door opening error notification) is started at the timing m of the transmission cycle T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on. Thus, the third error flag is output at the timing (timing k) of the payout command transmission cycle T2, but the third error notification is the next subcommand with the third error flag turned on. It turns on at the timing (timing m) of the transmission cycle T1.

  When the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the closing of the front frame door 106 at the timing v (door SW closed), the output of the door opening information signal is ended (off) at the timing w, and the door opening information signal is turned off. When the error flag of the third error is turned off at the timing n of the next payout command transmission cycle T2, the third error error notification ends at the timing r within the transmission cycle T2.

  In this example, the security information signal is turned on at timing b (the timing at which the first error flag is turned on), and remains on until it is turned off at timing q. When the door opening error flag is turned on, a door opening information signal is output. For this reason, the security information signal is turned off at timing q after 30 seconds have elapsed from timing f when the first error flag is turned off (error cancellation).

  Since there is only one security information signal, it cannot be output in correspondence with each error (first error and third error). That is, as in this example, even when an error related to the main control unit 300 (first error) and an error related to payout (third error) are detected in duplicate, the security information signal is the first error. Is turned on when the error is detected, and turned off when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) has elapsed from the timing of the last cancellation of the error to be cleared (timing when the error flag is turned off) It may be made to become. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the security information signal has a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupt) from the timing n when the error flag of the last error to be cleared (third error) is turned off. It turns off at the elapsed timing q. Note that the security information signal may be turned on at the same time (timing b) when the error flag of the first error is turned on, and the security information signal may be turned off when 30 seconds have elapsed from the turning on.

  In the above example, the door opening information signal is output immediately (regardless of the transmission cycles T1 and T2) when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and immediately when the closing is detected. Although an example in which the output ends (regardless of the transmission cycles T1 and T2) has been described, the door opening information signal (information signal regarding the payout) may be output at every payout command transmission cycle T2. .

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of an effect display for notifying a magnetic field detection error and a door opening error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG.

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 1 (1) to (8) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 43 (1) to (8), description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 is the timing when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106, or when the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame and the door SW is opened. (Timing s in FIG. 45). FIG. 10 (10) shows the timing of the transmission period T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on based on the opening of the door SW (timing m in FIG. 45). ), The third error notification (door opening error notification) is started. At this timing, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to execute the first error notification (error display E1 of the magnetic field detection error). At the same time, the third error notification (error display E2 of the door opening error, Here, “the door is open”) is starting to run. As described above, when a plurality of error notifications (error indications E1 and E2) are simultaneously performed, the previously displayed error notification (here, the error indication E1 regarding the magnetic detection error) moves upward and below that. In addition, an error notification (here, an error display E2 regarding a door opening error) to be notified later is displayed. The plurality of error notifications (error indications E1 and E2) may be displayed at least partially superimposed. In this case, the error display notified later covers at least a part of the previous error display. Or vice versa. Further, even if the number of errors to be notified increases, in order not to move the display position of the error display, it may be displayed in advance so that the display position is different for each error, or is displayed randomly. It may be a thing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11) is the timing when the third error flag is turned off (timing n in FIG. 45). At this timing, the first error flag is also turned off, but the first error notification (error display E1) and the third error notification (error display E2) are continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) is the timing (timing r in FIG. 45) when the third error notification (error display E2) is completed based on the third error flag being turned off. At this timing, the first error flag is also off, but the first error notification (error display E1) continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) is based on the fact that the first error flag is turned off (timing f in FIG. 45), and after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the timing f of error cancellation. This is the timing when the first error notification (error display E1) ends.

  <Example of timing chart and presentation display of signals related to magnetic (magnet) error>

  Next, a case where a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300 or the like has occurred will be described. FIG. 47A relates to the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and relates to the power supply, power-on state (PW_WATCH), transmission cycle T, and second error (magnetic detection error). ) Is an example of a timing chart of notification of a flag, a security information signal, and a second error (magnetic detection error) in the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 5B is an effect display corresponding to FIG. It is a figure which shows an example in time series.

  Referring to FIG. 4A, timings a, c, and ζ are timings at which the main control unit 300 ends / starts the subcommand transmission cycle T, respectively.

  When the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic (magnet) detection error (second Error). As a result, the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on at timing α of a certain transmission cycle T.

  Then, based on the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal being turned on, an error command of the magnetic detection error is immediately sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, timing β within the same transmission cycle T). The notification of the magnetic detection error (second error) starts to be transmitted. As described above, in the case of a second error (for example, a magnetic detection error) related to the main control unit 300 or the like, notification of the second error is started immediately when an error occurs.

  The magnetic detection error is an error that is restored (cancelled) when the power is turned on again. The power is shut off at the timing immediately before the timing γ, and the main control unit 300 enters the power shut-off state (PW_WATCH signal is off). At the detected timing γ, the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off. When the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off, the error detection command of the magnetic detection error is immediately transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (timing δ), and the notification of the magnetic detection error is ended.

  During the occurrence of a magnetic detection error, the determination in step S309 is Yes in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 15, and the processes from step S311 to step S337 are skipped. That is, when a magnetic detection error occurs, the notification of the magnetic detection error is started immediately, and the timer update process (step S311) is not executed. Therefore, the security information signal is displayed for a predetermined period after the error flag is turned off ( (30 seconds, 7500 interruption) is not counted, and output continues until a power interruption occurs.

  When the main control unit 300 detects the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) at the timing ε, the transmission cycle T resumes from the timing ζ at which the first (first) device management process is started after the power is turned on again. The start timing of the transmission cycle T after the power is turned on may start from the first main control unit timer interrupt process after the power is turned on again. In the first main control part main process after the power is turned on again, You may start from the next interrupt after the interrupt restriction of the main control unit timer interrupt process is completed.

  With reference to FIG. 7B, an example of the effect display for notifying the magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1A is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2 (2) indicates that the main control unit 300 changes the magnetic detection signal from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). The timing at which the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on based on the detection of the magnetic (magnet) detection error (second error) (timing α in FIG. 5A) It is.

  When the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, the main control unit 300 causes the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218. And all the second special symbol hold lamps 220 are turned off (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  The timing shown in FIG. 3 (3) is based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, and immediately (timing β in FIG. It is in a state. The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters “A magnet has been detected” are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) is the timing after power-off (timing δ in FIG. 5 (a)), and the timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is the timing after power-on (FIG. 5 (a)). (6) in FIG. 6 is a timing between the timing [epsilon] and the timing [zeta] in FIG. 6 (a), and (7) to (9) in FIG. The timing after the timing ζ. The timing shown in FIG. 7 is a state in which the magnetic detection error is released. With the cancellation of the magnetic detection error, the main control unit 300 is turned off from the timing when the magnetic detection error is detected, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special graphic display device 212, the second special graphic display device 214, The symbol hold lamp 216, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are all returned to the state before the detection of the magnetic detection error. Further, the fourth symbol display means 2081 (or the fourth symbol display means 2082) starts blinking (the same applies in the following embodiments).

  Referring to FIG. 48, a case where the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetism (magnet) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300 and the like occur will be described.

  FIG. 48 (a) relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetism (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, the transmission cycle T, and the first error. (Magnetic field detection error) flag, first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, second error (magnetic detection error) flag, second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and example of timing chart of security information signal FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, timings a and c are timings at which the main control unit 300 ends / starts the subcommand transmission cycle T, respectively.

  When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. When the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at timing α after the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (for example, within the same transmission cycle T), an error command for the magnetic field detection error is immediately issued (at timing β). The error notification of the magnetic detection error transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 starts to be executed. That is, the magnetic detection error is started immediately after the magnetic detection error flag is turned on without waiting for the next transmission cycle T (for example, within the same transmission cycle T), but the magnetic field detection error is the magnetic field detection error. The magnetic field detection error command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the transmission cycle T (transmission cycle T after timing c) after the transmission cycle T in which is turned on, and then error notification of the magnetic field detection error is executed. To start.

  An example of the effect display for notifying the magnetic field detection error and the magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1A is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2B is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b in FIG. 1A), and the timing shown in FIG. 3C is when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on. Is the timing (timing α in FIG. 5A).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) is based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, and an error command for magnetic field detection error is immediately transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 to detect the magnetic detection error (second Error) is a state in which notification is started (timing β in FIG. 5A). The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters “A magnet has been detected” are displayed.

  Thus, when a magnetic field detection error (first error relating to the main control unit 300 etc.) and a magnetic detection error (second error relating to the main control unit 300 etc.) are detected in duplicate, FIG. 3) Although both the magnetic field detection error flag and the magnetic detection error flag are on at the timings shown in (4), the only error that is notified is the error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error.

  Referring to FIG. 49, another example in which the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetism (magnet) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300 and the like occur in duplicate. Will be described.

  FIG. 49A relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetism (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, the transmission cycle T, and the first error. (Magnetic field detection error) flag, first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, second error (magnetic detection error) flag, second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and other timing charts of security information signal FIG. 4B is an example, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing another example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, timings a and c are timings at which the main control unit 300 ends / starts the subcommand transmission cycle T, respectively.

  In this example, when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. A subcommand for notifying the magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 at the timing d of the transmission cycle T next to the transmission cycle T when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on. Then, error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error starts.

  Then, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at the timing α after the magnetic field detection error error notification (error display E1) is started, and the magnetic detection error error notification (error display E2) starts at the subsequent timing β. .

  An example of the effect display for notifying the magnetic field detection error and the magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1A is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2B is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b in FIG. 1A), and the timing shown in FIG. This is a state in which error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started ((timing d in FIG. 5A)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) is the timing at which the magnetic detection error flag is turned on (timing α in FIG. 4 (a)) after the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started. is there. The magnetic detection error flag is turned on, and the timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is a state in which an error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is started based on the magnetic detection error flag being turned on (( This is the timing β) in FIG.

  As described above, when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started, the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is covered ( The error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is performed (so that the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is not displayed).

  As shown in FIG. 5 (5 '), when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the magnetic field detection error error notification (error display E1) is started, the magnetic field detection error error notification ( An error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is performed (over the error display E1) (while the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is also displayed). In this case, as shown in FIG. 5 (5 '), at least a part of the error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error. Alternatively, both may be made visible to the player.

  <Example of timing chart and signal display for signals related to a prize winning abnormality error>

  Next, a case where an error related to the main control unit 300 or the like (a big prize winning abnormality error) occurs will be described. In the following description, the special prize winning abnormality error refers to a special prize winning excess error. The extra prize winning error is generated when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric utility operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered is equal to the number of balls discharged. This error returns when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. 50 to 52 are examples of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 as shown in FIG. 3, for example, and FIGS. 56 to 50 are pachinko machines having the game board 200 shown in FIG. This is an example of a 100).

  FIG. 50 shows the state of fluctuation / stop of the special figure, the state of the continuous action device and the state of the condition device being activated / not activated, when the big prize opening excess error occurs in the 15th round during the big hit game, The state of driving (opening) / stopping (closing) the special winning opening solenoid, the operating / non-operating state of the special electric accessory (special electric combination), the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the variable winning opening 234 5 is an example of a timing chart of a status indicating that the winning / winning end of a prize is over, a security information signal, and a first winning control over winning prize error notification in the first sub-control unit 400.

  In this example, a case will be described in which only one big winning opening (attacker, variable winning opening 234) is provided in the game board 200.

  At timing A, the symbol variation by the special symbol display device (one of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped, and for example, the symbol (for example, “ When the special figure A ") is stopped and displayed, after the period set by the special figure display confirmation timer elapses, at the timing B, the condition device and the accessory continuous action device change from the non-actuated state to the activated state. Here, the continuous accessory operating device refers to a special device that can continuously operate the special electric accessory (in this example, the variable winning opening 234), and the condition device is an accessory that is operated. It is a device that is required for the operation of the continuous operation device, a combination of specific symbols is displayed, or a game ball (the entrance that opens or expands when the accessory continuous operation device is operating or an enlarged prize) (Excluding those that have won a prize in the mouth)) that operates when passing a specific area in the big prize mouth. In this embodiment, since the timing at which the operation of both the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device starts is the same as the timing at which the operation ends, the same timing chart is used.

  That is, the big hit game is started at the timing B. Then, at the timing C at which the jackpot start effect is performed and the jackpot start effect ends, the first round of the jackpot game is started, and the special electric accessory is changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state. Since the variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the large winning opening solenoid is also driven (released) from this timing, and the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric accessory becomes the activated state from the unactuated state. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the variable prize opening 234 passes through the count switch SW, this can be detected effectively, and it can be handled as having been awarded effectively to the variable prize opening 234. The count switch SW may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the variable prize opening 234 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls won in the variable winning opening 234, or the special power combination action data set (for example, “special electricity A” that is set in the first round when a big hit is made When the opening timer set by the combination action data 1 ") elapses, at the timing D, the big prize opening solenoid stops (closes) driving, and the variable prize opening 234 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning opening 234. Note that the special electric accessory continues to operate even after the variable prize opening 234 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses. . Then, at the timing E when the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer has elapsed, the special electric accessory changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the first round ends.

  When the first round is completed (when the special electric accessory is changed from the activated state to the inactivated state), the special electric accessory is activated again from the non-activated state at the timing F after the elapse of the period set by the special electric actor operation delay timer. The second round is started, and the large winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing, and the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric accessory is activated. Thereafter, the above-described operation is repeated until the 14th round, which is one round before the last round, is completed.

  In this example, it is assumed that the main control unit 300 detects an extra prize winning error in the middle of the 14th round. In the present embodiment, even in this case, the extra prize winning excess error flag is not turned on while the variable prize winning opening 234 is open. In the 14th round, the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234, or set in the 14th round in the case of a big hit with the set special electric character operation data (for example, “Special Figure A”) When the opening timer set by the “special electric utility operation data 1”) elapses, at the timing G, the large winning opening solenoid stops (closes) driving, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning opening 234. Then, at the timing H when the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses, the special electric accessory is changed from the activated state to the non-actuated state, and the 15th round is completed. Then, at this timing H, the special winning mouth winning excess error flag is turned on. At the same timing H, the security information signal is turned on, and at timing I, an error notification subcommand is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Notification starts.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if a big prize winning prize excess error is detected during the big hit game (when the variable prize winning opening is open), the big prize winning prize excess error flag is not immediately turned on, At the end of the round, more specifically, at the timing when the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer has elapsed and the special electric accessory becomes inactive from the operating state (timing H in the figure), The winning mouth winning excess error flag is set to ON.

  When the 14th round is completed, the 15th round is started at the timing J after the elapse of a predetermined period, and the special electric accessory is changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state again. The mouth 234 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric accessory is activated.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the variable winning opening 234 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the driving of the large winning opening solenoid is stopped at timing K. Thus, the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the above-mentioned special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning opening 234. And after the variable winning opening 234 is closed, the special electric accessory is in an operating state until the round is ended, that is, until the period set by the special electric character operating interval timer elapses.

  At the timing L when the period set by the special electric combination operation interval timer elapses, the 15th round in which the special electric combination is changed from the active state to the non-operated state and the count switch SW is also disabled from the valid state ends. After that, when the period set by the special electric charge operation delay timer elapses, the big hit end effect is started, and this big hit end effect is performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses.

  At the timing M when the big hit end effect ends, the accessory continuous action device and the condition device change from the activated state to the non-activated state, and the big hit game ends.

  When the big hit game is finished, generally, from the timing Q (the timing after one interruption from the big hit game end timing M), the variation of the reserved special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is started. The However, in this example, the prize winning excess prize error is not eliminated at this timing (because the prize winning excess prize error flag is on), and the prize winning prize excess exceeded by the first sub-control unit 400. The error notification continues, and the symbol fluctuation of the reserved special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) is in a standby state.

  Then, at timing N, when the special winning slot winning excess error flag is turned off and the special winning prize winning excess error flag is resolved, the special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Special Figure 1 or special figure) held at the timing O after one interruption is cleared. The symbol variation of FIG. 2) is started. Then, at timing P, an error cancellation command for the big prize winning prize excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the error cancellation (timing N), The error notification of the extra prize winning extra error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big prize winning prize excess error occurs during the big hit game, the big prize winning prize excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error has occurred. . And even if the jackpot game of the predetermined number of rounds is over, if a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred (the big prize winning prize excess error flag is on and the big prize winning prize exceeded) If the error has not been resolved), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) that is put on hold, the symbol variation is not started and the standby state is set. . Then, when the extra prize winning excess error flag is turned off and the extra winning prize winning excess error is resolved, the symbol variation of the special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) that is put on hold at the next interruption will occur. Be started. The error display E3 is continuously displayed until a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of an effect display for notifying the big prize winning prize excess error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in (1) of FIG. 1 is such that the symbol fluctuation by the special figure display device (one of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) stops. In this example, the symbol “probability big hit” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the big hit game is started (timing B in FIG. 50). In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 2B is a state in which a jackpot start effect (in this example, the display of the character “right-handed!” Notifying the player that the player is right-handed!) Is being performed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 3 (3) is a state in which the jackpot start effect has ended and the first round of the jackpot game has started (timing C in FIG. 50). Become. Since the variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the large winning opening solenoid is also driven (released) from this timing, and the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric accessory becomes the activated state from the unactuated state. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first round effect of the big hit game is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4 (4) is a state in which the 14th round, which is one round before the final round, has started, and the round effect of the 14th round is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is a state (timing H in FIG. 50) in which the 14th round is completed (the special electric accessory has changed from an operating state to an inoperative state). In this example, during the period from (4) to (5) in the figure, the main control unit 300 detects an extra prize winning error. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, even if the main control unit 300 detects a big prize opening prize excess error while opening the variable prize opening, the big prize opening prize excess error flag is immediately turned on. First, at the end of the round, that is, at the timing ((timing H in FIG. 50)) shown in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6), an error notification subcommand is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 reports an error in the extra prize winning prize (in this example, In this state, an error display E3 is started (the timing I in FIG. 50) with the characters “Large winning mouth winning error” (timing I in FIG. 50) The error display E3 is a round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Overlaid (in front of it) is displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (7), the 15th round is started, the special electric accessory is again activated from the non-actuated state, and the large prize opening solenoid is also driven at this timing, and the variable prize opening 234 is opened. The timing when the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state (timing J in FIG. 50). The grand prize winning prize excess error has not been eliminated, and the round effect and the error indication E3 of the big prize winning prize excess error are continued in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 8 (8) shows the timing (timing K in FIG. 50) at which the variable prize opening 234 is closed due to the drive of the big prize opening solenoid being stopped, and FIG. Is a state in which the special electric accessory is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the count switch SW is changed from the effective state to the ineffective state, and the 15th round is ended (timing L in FIG. 50). Even during these periods, the extra prize winning excess error has not been eliminated, and the round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the error indication E3 of the extra prize winning excess error are continued. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) is a state in which the fifteenth round has ended, the period set by the special electric utility operation delay timer has elapsed, and the jackpot end effect has started. In this example, the jackpot end effect is a display (in this example, “probability rush”) indicating that the display has been changed to the probability change state in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or a warning notification of forgetting to take a prepaid card (this In the example, the text includes “Please pay attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card”. Also at this timing, the prize winning excess winning error is not eliminated, and the big winning prize winning excess error display E3 continues in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 over the jackpot end effect. . The big hit end effect is continuously performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses. Note that the right-handed notification ("right-handed" character and right arrow) for notifying that the player is in the right-handed state in the jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 10 (10) may not be displayed (also in the following examples). The same).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 is the timing when the period set by the hit end display timer has elapsed and the jackpot end effect has ended. In this example, at this timing, the winning prize excess winning error has not been resolved (because the winning prize winning excess error flag is on), and the first winning prize winning error by the first sub-control unit 400 is not detected. The notification (error display E3) is continuing, and the symbol variation of the special figure (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) that is being held is in a standby state (the main control unit 300 is performing symbol variation control. Absent). For this reason, after the end of the jackpot end effect, a demo screen (a symbol demo, a manufacturer logo, etc.) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) is a state (timing M in FIG. 50) in which the accessory continuous action device and the condition device are changed from the activated state to the unactuated state and the big hit game is finished. Even at this timing, the prize winning excess prize error has not been resolved, and the first sub-control unit 400 continues to report the prize winning prize excess error, and is suspended. Since the symbol variation in FIG. 2) is in a standby state, a logo (maker logo) screen (or a demo screen or the like) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) is the timing (timing N in FIG. 50) when the big prize opening winning excess error flag is turned off and the big winning prize winning excess error is eliminated. In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 14 (14) is a timing after one interruption (timing O in FIG. 50) at the timing when the big prize winning prize excess error flag is turned off (for example, timing O in FIG. 50). , Special Figure 1) is the state in which the symbol variation has started. At this timing, since the error cancel command for the big prize winning prize excess error has not been transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control part 400, the logo screen and the error indication E3 for the big prize winning prize excess error are continuously displayed. Has continued. In this example, the logo screen is displayed in the state where the symbol variation is started, but the symbol variation may be configured to be started in the state where the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) corresponds to the display area (symbol display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (instead of the logo display) in accordance with the start of the symbol fluctuation of the special figure (for example, special figure 1) that is held. 208a to 208c), a stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, the symbol demo displays the same display as the stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). In this embodiment, when a symbol demo is displayed as shown in FIG. 15 (15), instead of the symbol demo, a decorative symbol stop display (for example, the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7− Decoration 7-Decoration 7 ")) may be performed, and this is the same in the following embodiments.

  In addition, the decorative symbol stop display state is a state in which a first error (for example, a big prize mouth winning excess error) has occurred and a state in which the error has not occurred (during demonstration and / or symbol stop) And may be the same or different. For example, the decorative symbol stop display state in which the first error has occurred may be a still image, and the decorative symbol stop display state in which the first error has not occurred may be an animation. In addition, when the decorative symbol display is composed of “character image” and “number or character”, the stop display state of the decorative symbol in which the first error has occurred is “character image” and “numeric character”. Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop display state in a state where the first error is not generated may be configured from “character image”. Here, the “character image” and the “number or character image” may be a moving image or a still image. Further, the stop display state of the decorative symbols may be different between the demonstration and the symbol stop. For example, some or all of the decorative symbols may be animated during the demonstration, and the decorative symbols may be displayed as still images while the symbols are stopped, or vice versa. Here, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the first error is the same as that during the symbol stop, but may be the same as during the demonstration.

  In addition, during the first error (for example, a big winning opening prize excess error), the decoration symbol may be the same display as the stop display (decoration symbol is stopped).

  In addition, during the first error (for example, a big prize mouth winning excess error), the decorative symbol may be displayed differently from the stop display, for example, a display in which the decorative symbol in the symbol demo is animated. Or a decorative symbol display pattern dedicated to the first error (for example, a big prize opening prize excess error).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16), an error cancel command for a big prize opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the error cancel (timing N). ) After the elapse of time, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the error notification of the big prize opening winning excess error has been completed (timing P in FIG. 50). In the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Then, after this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the display area (symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, from the timing shown in FIG. 15 (16) or FIG. 16 (16), the decorative symbol variation display may be started in the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big prize winning prize excess error occurs during the big hit game, the big prize winning prize excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error has occurred. . And even if the jackpot game of the predetermined number of rounds is over, if a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred (the big prize winning prize excess error flag is on and the big prize winning prize exceeded) If the error has not been resolved), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) that is put on hold, it waits for its symbol variation. Then, when the big hit end effect is completed during the period waiting for the next symbol variation, a logo screen, a demo screen, and the like are displayed, and the display is stopped as it is. When the extra prize winning over error flag is turned off and the extra prize winning over error error is resolved, the symbol variation of the special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) that is put on hold will be started at the next interruption. The The error display E3 is continuously displayed until a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

  If the combination of decorative symbols for normal big hits is prepared, the probable promotion effect may be performed during the big hit round even during the period in which the big prize winning prize excess error flag is on.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect display of FIG. 52 (9a) to (16a) are modified examples corresponding to FIGS. 51 (9) to (16), respectively.

  The timing shown in FIG. 52 (9a) is the state in which the 15th round has been completed (timing L in FIG. 50), and a notification of an extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) is performed over the round effect. . Further, FIG. 10A shows a state in which the jackpot end effect has been started, and a notification of an extra winning prize winning error (error display E3) is performed on the jackpot end effect. As shown in the figure (10a), in the jackpot end effect, there is no notification of a warning for forgetting to take a prepaid card (for example, displaying characters such as “Be careful to forget to take a prepaid card”). Also good. In addition, a warning for forgetting to take a prepaid card will be issued at the first jackpot end effect, and a warning for forgetting to take a prepaid card will not be given for the jackpot end effect for the second jackpot or later. Also good. In addition, in the jackpot end effect, the warning for forgetting to take a prepaid card is not performed, and after the first jackpot is displayed, the warning for forgetting to remove the prepaid card is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Good. Note that the alerting notification is not limited to forgetting to take the prepaid card, but may be other alerting notifications (for example, how to strike (right-handed, left-handed), etc.).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11a) is a state in which the big hit end effect has ended. As shown in FIG. 11 (11), even after the jackpot end effect, the winning prize winning excess error has not been resolved, and the winning prize winning excess error notification (error display E3) continues. When the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is in a standby state, a look-ahead notice (in this example) suggesting a reserved villa in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The display of the character (dono) and the display of the characters “Large behaviour!”) May be executed. Here, the “reserved in-resort villa” in the present embodiment refers to a case where there is a big hit in the prefetch result for the special figure variable game that is currently reserved as a result of the special figure prefetch process.

  Note that the pre-reading notice may be the same in a state in which the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred or in a state in which the error has not occurred, or may be different. Good.

  In addition, when the prefetching notice is displayed up to the change to be prefetched, the prefetching notice animation may be performed in a still image without performing the prefetching notice animation. The pre-reading notice in this case may be a notice selected by a pre-reading effect lottery in a high probability state, or may be a notice selected by a pre-reading effect lottery in a low probability state. Here, the high probability state and the low probability state correspond to the state of the special figure status, but even if the special figure status is the high probability state, the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) is canceled. A pre-reading effect lottery in a low-probability state may be performed until the symbol change starts.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12a) is a state where the big hit game is finished (timing M in FIG. 50). Even at this timing, the winning prize excess winning error has not been resolved, and the first sub-control unit 400 continues to report the winning prize winning excess error (error display E3) and is suspended (see FIG. Since the symbol fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is in a standby state, the pre-reading notice suggesting the reserved resort is continuously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a big prize in the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the start of the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1). A symbol demo (in this example, the stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”)) is performed behind the notification of the excessive winning prize error (error display E3). It is in a state of being broken. In this case, the hold icon PI may be displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (a) is in a state (timing P in FIG. 50) in which the error notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 has been completed due to the error cancellation of the big prize winning prize excess error. Yes, in the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of decorative symbols has started.

  Also in this example, during the period shown in FIG. 9 (a) to FIG. 15 (a) (the period in which the winning prize winning excess error is not canceled), the winning prize winning excess error error display E3 continues to be displayed. Yes.

  FIG. 52 (12b) to FIG. 52 (b3-1α) are modifications after FIG. 51 (12). The timing shown in FIG. 52 (12b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 51 (12), and is a state where the big hit game is finished (timing M in FIG. 50).

  FIG. 52 (b1) shows a state following FIG. 12 (b). Even at this timing, the winning prize excess winning error has not been resolved, and the first sub-control unit 400 continues to report the winning prize winning excess error (error display E3) and is suspended (see FIG. Since the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is in a standby state, the logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display is stopped as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b1), in addition to the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect indicating a simultaneous effect (in this example, a telop image (animation) indicating that the princess LIVE is being held) A cut-in image) or a countdown display (animation) such as “up to simultaneous production ○ second” may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 (b1 ′) shows a state following FIG. 12 (b). Even at this timing, the winning prize excess winning error has not been resolved, and the first sub-control unit 400 continues to report the winning prize winning excess error (error display E3) and is suspended (see FIG. Since the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is in a standby state, a logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b1 ′), in addition to the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect showing a simultaneous effect (in this example, a wipe image (animation) of a character (princess), , A countdown display (animation) such as “up to simultaneous production ○ second” may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 (b2-1) is a state following FIG. 52 (b), and FIG. 52 (b2-2) is a state following FIG. 52 (b2-1). As shown in FIGS. 52 (b2-1) and (b2-2), in addition to the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) and the logo screen, the user setting is made in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A screen (in this example, a volume setting screen) may be displayed. Here, the volume (user setting value) that was “2” in FIG. 52 (b2-1) is changed to “3” in FIG. 52 (b2-2). As shown in both figures, the user can change the volume setting (user setting value), but the actual setting value remains “5”. Note that the actual setting value may be changed along with the change of the user setting value. In this example, the volume setting screen is shown as an example, but a luminance setting screen may be used. In this example, the volume setting screen is configured so that the volume can be adjusted to decrease by operating the left key, and the volume can be adjusted to increase by operating the right key. Other keys (up key, down key) , Chance button, Enter button), the volume cannot be adjusted, but the volume can be adjusted by pressing the left key or down key on the volume adjustment screen, and by pressing the right key or up key You may be comprised so that adjustment which raises a volume can be performed.

  FIG. 52 (b3-1) is a state following FIG. 12 (b). As shown in FIG. 52 (b3-1), in addition to the notification of the extra prize winning prize winning error (error display E3) and the logo screen (design demo screen) (that is, in the demo state), the display area of the design display device 208 Settings change icons such as volume setting and brightness setting and menu display may be displayed

  FIGS. 52 (b3-2) and (b3-3) are states following FIG. 52 (b3-1), in which a notification of an extra prize winning excess error (error display E3) and a symbol demo screen are displayed. After the time has elapsed, the symbol demo screen is changed to the anime demo screen (the symbol demo state is changed to the anime demo state) (FIG. 52 (b3-2)). May be changed to the symbol demo screen (the animation demo state is changed to the symbol demo state) (FIG. 52 (b3-3)). Also in this case, when the big prize winning prize excess error is not canceled, the big prize winning prize excess error notification (error display E3) continues.

  FIG. 52 (b3-3 ′) is a state following FIG. 52 (b3-2), in which an error notification E3 error notification and an animation demo screen are displayed (FIG. 52 (b3)). -2)) After the predetermined time has elapsed, a symbol demo (decorative symbol stop display) may be performed instead of the animation demo screen (Fig. 52 (b3-3 ')). Also in this case, when the big prize winning prize excess error is not canceled, the big prize winning prize excess error notification (error display E3) continues. In this example, a setting change icon such as volume setting or brightness setting and a menu display (display indicating that the actual machine customization menu can be displayed) are displayed. However, during power support, volume setting and brightness setting are displayed. The setting change icon such as the menu display may not be displayed.

  52 (b3-1α) is a state following FIG. 52 (b3-1), and when the operating means is operated based on the menu display in the state of FIG. 52 (b3-1), FIG. The actual machine customization menu may be displayed as shown in 1α), or the actual machine customization menu may not be displayed. Further, when the operation means is operated based on setting change icons such as volume setting and brightness setting, a volume setting screen and a brightness setting screen may be displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (b2-1). However, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that both the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen are displayed by one operation of the operation means, or only when the corresponding operation means is operated (for example, the volume setting screen May be configured to display a volume key setting screen or a luminance setting screen.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect display during the notification (error display E3) period of the big prize opening winning excess error shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. FIG. 53 (b3-2α) is a state following FIG. 52 (b3-2), and when the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) and the animation demo screen are displayed, the effect movable body 224 is displayed. May work. The effect movable body 224 in this case may move the entire movable range in multiple stages as shown in FIG. Further, the effect movable body 224 may move a part of the movable range in multiple stages, or may move the whole or part of the movable range continuously (smoothly). In this example, the animation demo screen is displayed. However, the effect movable body 224 may be operated when the symbol demo screen is displayed.

  FIG. 53 (b3-1β) is a state following FIG. 52 (b3-1), and the chance button 136 is displayed when the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo screen are displayed. When operated, an effect by operating the back button (here, an animation in which a character (Hani) appears from one of the display areas of the decorative design display device 208) may be executed.

  FIGS. 53 (b4-1) and (b4-2) are states following FIG. 52 (12b), in which a notification of an extra prize winning excess error (error display E3) and a symbol demo screen are displayed. The usual drawing effect (for example, the effect that expects the electric chew to be long open (in this example, the display of the Amidakuji image (FIG. 53 (b 4-1)) and the determination result (FIG. 53 (b 4-2))) In other words, it is only the special figure floating game that waits in the state that the big prize winning prize excess error has not been canceled, and the usual figure winning game and the accompanying variable drawing game (decorative symbol display) The decorative pattern variation display by the device 208 and the lamp (LED) may be executed without waiting.

  It should be noted that the ordinary drawing (for example, the above-mentioned Amidakuji image) is an effect that is performed only in the low accuracy state of the normal figure, and is not displayed in the high accuracy state of the normal figure, but is also displayed in the high accuracy state of the general figure. Also good.

  In addition, the usual floating game may be performed regardless of whether or not the first error (for example, a grand prize winning prize excess error) has occurred, but the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error) You may not perform it during.

  FIG. 53 (b4-1 ′) is a modified example of FIG. 53 (b4-1). In the production that expects the electric Chu to be long open (in this example, the display of the Amidakuji image) A notice (in this example, “heat” or the like) may be displayed. In this state, a pre-reading notice about the increased holding may be performed.

  FIG. 53 (12c) is a modified example of FIG. 51 (12). After the big hit game end effect, the logo screen is not displayed, but the big prize opening prize excess error notification (error display E3) and the big hit game end effect are displayed. The display may be continued. Further, at this timing (timing M in FIG. 50), the right-handed notification may be terminated.

  53 (10d) to 53 (12d) are modified examples of FIGS. 51 (10) to (12) corresponding to after the big hit game end effect (timing M in FIG. 50), and the timing after the big hit game end effect. At (timing M in FIG. 50), an effect that allows the user to select a probability variation mode started thereafter may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (10 d), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image indicating the lord mode and the princess mode and an operation means image BG for prompting an operation of an operation button (for example, the chance button 136) In this example, an image imitating the chance button 136) and an elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time (valid period) of the operation button reception period are displayed. An image notifying that the mode has been entered may be displayed ((d1) in the figure), and the display may be continued ((d) in the figure). In addition, during this period, notification of an extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) continues. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12D, a warning notice for forgetting to take a prepaid card (in this example, a character “Please be careful not to forget to take a prepaid card”) may be provided. It is not necessary to notify the alert.

  53 (15e) to 53 (16e) are modified examples corresponding to FIGS. 51 (15) to 51 (16). After the extra prize winning excess error is canceled (after the extra prize winning excess error flag is turned off), the decoration of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) starts with the decoration change. In the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the symbol display device 208, behind the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3), a symbol demo (in this example, the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, “ (Decoration display of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7))) is performed (FIG. 53 (15e)), and when the variation display of the variation decoration pattern is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, A right-handed notification (in this example, “right-handed →” may be displayed in a larger size) over the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) and the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 53 (e1)). Right The notification may be displayed, for example, at the time of the first big hit, etc. Then, an error cancel command of the big prize winning prize excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 to cancel the error. After a certain period of time (for example, 33 seconds) from (timing N), the error notification of the extra winning prize winning error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends, but the decorative symbol variation display and the right-handed notification continue. (FIG. 53 (16e)) It should be noted that right-handed notification may be displayed even when the error of the big prize opening winning excess error is canceled, but right-handed notification may not be displayed after error cancellation. Good.

  FIG. 54 is a view showing a modification of the effect display during the notification (error display E3) period of the extra winning prize winning error corresponding to FIGS. 51 (10) to 51 (14). 54 (10f) and FIG. 54 (11f) are the same as FIG. 51 (10) and FIG. 51 (11), respectively, so description thereof will be omitted.

  54 (12f) to FIG. 54 (14f) are timings corresponding to FIG. 51 (12) to FIG. 51 (14). First, as shown in FIG. 54 (12f), at the timing when the big hit game is finished (timing M in FIG. 50), the notification of the big prize winning prize winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo (the combination of the previous big hit symbols) (For example, “decoration display of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) may be performed.

  FIGS. 54 (f1-1) and (f1-2) are states following FIG. 54 (12f), and the special figure held after the timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 50). The symbol variation (for example, special figure 1) may be started. In this case, the symbol demonstration is continued, but when the holding increases, a holding icon PI (an increasing animation of the holding icon) may be displayed. In this case, the increase animation of the hold icon may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred and the state in which the error has not occurred. May be.

  In addition, when the first error (for example, a big prize opening prize excess error) is occurring, the increase animation of the hold icon may not be performed.

  Further, when the number of holdings increases simultaneously in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the increase animation of the holding icon may be performed at the same time, and the display of the icon corresponding to the holding that is digested first is started. Display of the hold icon that will be digested later may be started. In the case of a model that preferentially digests the suspension of Special Figure 2 (or Special Figure 1) (hereinafter referred to as a priority digester), if there is a suspension corresponding to a special figure that is not preferentially digested, It may be configured to display only a hold icon corresponding to a special figure that is preferentially digested during support (in the case of special figure 2 priority digester, a hold corresponding to special figure 2). , A hold that is not preferentially digested may be displayed. In the case of Special Figure 2 (or Special Figure 1) priority digesters, if there is a hold corresponding to a special figure that is not preferentially digested, it will be given priority over normal (special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy). A special icon to be digested (in the case of special figure 2 priority digesters, a hold icon corresponding to special figure 2) and a special figure that is not preferentially digested (in the case of special figure 2 priority digesters, Both the “hold” corresponding to the special figure 1) may be displayed, but the hold icon corresponding to the special figure that is preferentially digested may not be displayed. In addition, in the case of a model that digests suspension in the order of winning regardless of the special figure type (hereinafter referred to as a winning order digester), a hold icon corresponding to all suspensions is displayed regardless of the special figure type. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that the hold icons corresponding to all the holds are not displayed during the electric support (probability change and / or time reduction).

  The timing shown in FIG. 54 (13f) is the timing (timing N in FIG. 50) when the big prize opening prize excess error flag is turned off and the big prize opening prize excess error is resolved. In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 14 is the timing after one interruption (timing O in FIG. 50) of the timing at which the big prize opening winning excess error flag is turned off. At this timing, since the error cancel command of the big prize winning prize excess error has not been transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control part 400, the decorative symbol stop display and the error indication of the big prize winning prize excess error continue. E3 continues to display.

  FIG. 54 (f2) is a state subsequent to FIG. 54 (12f). As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the holding increases, the holding icon PI of the pre-reading notice may be displayed.

  FIGS. 54 (f3-1) and (f3-2) are states following FIG. 54 (12f). As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the holding increases, a standby icon standby animation (in this example, by a character (Hani)) A standby icon standby animation) may be displayed. The hold icon PI in this case may be a normal hold icon or a hold icon for performing pre-reading notice. In addition, the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same in a state where the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred and in a state where the error has not occurred, or different. There may be. In addition, when the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error) is occurring, the standby icon standby animation may not be performed (for example, a still image may be displayed). ).

  FIG. 54 (f4) is a state following FIG. 12 (f). As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the holding increases, a pattern may be displayed by the light guide plate as a pre-reading notice. Note that the display light emission of the pattern by the light guide plate as shown in this example may be performed during a demonstration (symbol demo or animation demo) or during a big hit end effect. For example, the light guide plate may emit light and display a pattern → not display may be repeated even during the occurrence of an extra prize winning error. Not only the light guide plate, but also various effect lamps may emit light with a pre-reading light emission pattern (demonstration light emission pattern). You may make it do. In addition, you may be comprised so that the brightness | luminance of LED which irradiates light to a light-guide plate can be adjusted with the brightness | luminance setting by a user.

  54 (f5-1) and (f5-2) are states following (12f) in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the holding increases, the effect movable body 224 is operated as a pre-reading notice. Also good. In this case, an operation of moving a part of the movable range of the effect movable body 224 in multiple steps (turning operation) may be performed, and an operation of moving out the entire movable range in multiple steps is performed. It may be a thing. Further, instead of the multi-step operation, it may move smoothly.

  FIGS. 54 (f6-1) and (f6-2) are states following FIG. 12 (12f). As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started, the music may be changed. In this case, the song name may be displayed by operating the operation means (operation buttons, keys), and the song name may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed, or the song name may not be deleted (for example, unless the operation means is operated). It may be. Various production settings (music, production mode, etc.) may be performed. Further, the background may be changed by setting the production mode. It should be noted that the music selected by operating the operating means may not be output from the speaker 120 during the notification of the extra winning prize winning error. Here, the notification by the speaker 120 of the extra prize winning prize excess error may be configured to continue for 30 seconds after the error is canceled, but for a certain period (for example, 30) after the error is started. 2 seconds), the notification by the speaker 120 is terminated, and the music selected by the operation of the operation means (not only the music selected by the operation of the operation means, but also the background display and various effects (for example, big hit round, etc.) ) May be configured to be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but may be the same as the notification by the speaker 120. Alternatively, the music may be output at a lower volume than when the error state is not established. Note that the above-described error notification by the speaker 120 is not limited to the big prize opening prize excess error, but may be applicable to other errors for which notification by the speaker 120 is performed.

  FIG. 54 (12f ′) is a modification of the timing shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the symbol demonstration is performed at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 50), the operation means image BG related to the effect may be always displayed. Further, when the operation button (for example, the chance button 136) cannot be operated at this timing (timing M in FIG. 50) or the like, the operation means image BG is displayed in gray and the operation button reception period. The elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time may be hidden to indicate that the operation of the operation button is disabled.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect during the period of notification of the big prize winning prize excess error (error display E3). First, FIGS. 55 (f7-1) and (f7-2) are in a state following FIG. 54 (12f), and a notification (error display E3) of a big prize winning prize excess error and a symbol demo are displayed. In addition, the back button effect may be executed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (f7-1), the operation means image BG and the elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG are displayed. By operating the button (operation means, chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 55 (f7-2), a back button effect (in this example, an animation in which a character (Hani) appears) may be executed. .

  FIG. 55 (f8) is a state following FIG. 54 (12f), and a special figure that is put on hold is displayed when an error notification (error display E3) and a symbol demo are displayed. When the symbol variation (for example, Special Figure 1) has started and the number of holds has increased, a look-ahead notice (in this example, an animation in which the character “approaching intense heat” moves) is displayed. Also good.

  FIG. 55 (f9) is a state following FIG. 54 (12f), and a special figure that is put on hold is displayed when an error notification E3 error notification and a symbol demo are displayed. When the symbol variation (for example, Special Figure 1) starts and the number of holds increases, a pre-reading notice may be combined. For example, as shown in the figure, a pre-reading notice by display (animation) (in this example, an animation in which the characters “approaching intense heat” move) and a pre-reading notice by a hold icon may be performed.

  Further, FIG. 55 (11g) to FIG. 12 (12g) are states corresponding to FIG. 51 (11) to FIG. 5 (12). The timing shown in FIG. 55 (11g) is a state in which the big hit game has been completed (timing M in FIG. 50), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the prize winning opening is overlaid on the demo screen (logo screen). In this state, error notification (error display E3) is being performed. In this example, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, another display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) D) is provided. The liquid crystal display device D includes a frame part D1 (shown by hatching) that defines the outer shape thereof, and a display area D2 inside the frame part D1, and performs various effects (displays) in the display area D2. The liquid crystal display device D may be a movable decorative unit configured to be movable, or may be configured to be immovable.

  FIG. 55 (g-1) is a modified example of FIG. 55 (11g), and displays one or related images using two display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 and another liquid crystal display device D. It may be. In this case, the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

  FIG. 55 (12g) is a state following the state (g-1) (timing when the big hit game is finished (timing M in FIG. 50)), and the decorative symbol display device 208 and other liquid crystal display devices D Different images may be displayed in each of the two display areas. Here, an example is shown in which a symbol demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a hold icon is displayed on another liquid crystal display device D. In this case, the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error (error display E3) may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

  The display in each display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other liquid crystal display device D in FIG. 55 (g-1) (here, the image in which the eyelids are closed) is changed from the same diagram (11g) to the same diagram (12g). This is a display during the transition. In this way, when the display behind the large winning mouth winning error notification (error display E3) is changed (here, the logo image shown in FIG. 11G) is changed from the logo image shown in FIG. ), The display for transition (for example, the image in which the eyelid is closed in FIG. 55 (g-1)) may be displayed between them. The display for transition (for example, the display in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 55G-1) can also be applied to a configuration that does not have the liquid crystal display device D.

  FIG. 56 shows, for example, a special case where a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred in the pachinko machine 100 having two big prize winning openings (the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804) as shown in FIG. State of fluctuation / stop of figure, operation / non-operation state of accessory continuous operating device and condition device, state of driving (opening) / stopping (closing) of special prize opening 2 solenoid, special electric accessory (special electric utility 2 ) Activated / not-actuated state, special electric player 2 in-operation signal (for test) activated / non-actuated state, special electric character 2 winning detection timer set / unset state, provided in the second attacker 804 The ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2) is enabled / disabled, the probability change area solenoid is driven (open) / stopped (closed), the probability change area is enabled / disabled, and the winning prize 1 solenoid is driven ( Open) / Stopped (closed) state, special electric component (special electric component 1) activated / not activated, special electric component 1 operating signal (for testing) activated / not activated, special electric component 1 winning detection timer The set / unset state, the valid / invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802, the extra prize winning error flag, the security information signal, and the first sub-control unit 400 It is an example of a timing chart of a large winning mouth winning excess error notification in. In this example, it is assumed that an extra prize winning excess error is detected in a round (between timing (2) and timing (4)) during the big hit game.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special power 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In this embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. Thereby, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, it can be detected effectively, and can be handled as having been awarded to the second attacker 804 effectively. Become.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric function 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened), and the probability variation region is changed from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the count switch SW1. is there. Note that the count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the timing of the big winning opening 2 solenoid is reached at timing (4). The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special electric character operation interval timer (a timer for setting a period for detecting a remaining ball, for example, 100 ms) is set, and a special electric character winning detection timer (special electric character 2 winning detection timer according to the second attacker 804) ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state where the special electric combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 2 is inactivated. The special power 2 is in an operating state after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until a period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric function activation delay timer is set, the special electric function 2 in-operation signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state, the probability variation area solenoid stops driving (closed), and the probability variation area becomes invalid from the valid state. It becomes a state. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in an open state (for example, opened for 100 ms) → closed state (for example, closed for 1400 ms) → open state (for example, between timing (2) and timing (3), for example) During this period, the probability variation area continues to be valid.

  Also, in this example, a prize winning excess prize error is detected between timing (2) and timing (3), and the prize winning prize excess error flag is turned on at timing (5). The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing when the first sub-control unit 400 starts to notify the error of the extra prize winning prize excess error.

  Timing (7) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first prize opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric function 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is activated. From the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when becomes an operating state.

  At the timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the special electric character 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric character 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the count switch SW2. is there.

  If the same special power activation data (“special power activation data 1”) is used for the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 are used. And the same time. In addition, the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may set different special power operation data, so that the respective opening times may be different, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker Special electric power operation data used only in one of 804 may be prepared.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned maximum winning game ball winnings to the first attacker 802 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (9), the large winning opening 1 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. The In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. The special electric utility 1 is in an operating state after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until a period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (10) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special power combination operation delay timer is set, and the special power combination 1 operation signal (for testing) also changes from the operation state to the non-operation state.

  The timing (11) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (10) has elapsed, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the big winning port 2 solenoid is also driven to open the second variable winning port 234, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric role 2 is activated.

  At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (13), the big winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. The

  Timing (14) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special power combination operation delay timer is set, and the special power combination 2 operation in-progress signal (for test) also changes from the operation state to the non-operation state.

  The timing (15) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (14) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first prize opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric function 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is activated. From the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when becomes an operating state.

  Timing (16) indicates that the winning game is based on the winning of the above-mentioned maximum number of game balls to the second attacker 804 in the final round or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data has elapsed. This is the timing when the second solenoid 804 is closed (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. The

  Timing (17) is a timing at which the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses and the special electric utility 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the final round ends. At this timing, the special power combination operation delay timer is set, and the special power combination 2 operation in-progress signal (for test) also changes from the operation state to the non-operation state.

  Timing (18) is a timing at which the big hit game is ended when the accessory continuous operating device and the condition device are changed from the operating state to the non-operating state.

  According to the conventional pachinko machine, the timing (19) is the timing at which the symbol variation of the next special figure starts with the end of the jackpot game, but in this embodiment, at this timing, Since the big prize mouth excess error flag remains on, the symbol variation of the special figure remains stopped at the timing (19).

  57 to 59 are diagrams showing an example of the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series when the extra prize winning prize excess error occurs in the effect display example shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 includes, as an example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, and a probability change region (a probability change operation region 808) as shown in FIG. The symbol (for example, “special symbol A”) stops in the stop symbol pattern as shown in FIG.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 57 (5a) to 57 (7a) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 11 (5) to 11 (7). Also, in this example, it is assumed that a big prize opening excess error has occurred in the fourth round of the big hit game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (a) shows a state in which the 4R-th jackpot game has started. At this timing, the V prize suggestion effect (here, the letters “Aim at the V attacker!” And the downward-pointing arrow indicating the position of the attacker unit 810) is being performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (a) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the probability variation operation region 808 (the state in which a V prize is won) in the 4R of the big hit game. At this timing, an effect of notifying that a V prize has been won (in this case, the display of the letter “V”) is performed, which suggests that a promiscuous state is reached after the end of the big hit game.

  The timing shown in (a0) of the figure shows a state in which the 4Rth of the jackpot game has ended, and the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won is continued.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A1, an error display E3 for notifying the big prize winning prize excess error is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the 4R end of the big hit game. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is displayed in addition to the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (a2) shows the state where the 5R game of the big hit game has started, and the error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is continued with the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won. it's shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (7a) shows a state in which the 6Rth of the big win game has started, and an error display E3 for notifying the extra winning prize winning error is continuously displayed on the round effect after winning the V prize. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (a) shows a state in which the jackpot game ends. As an effect to notify the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot end display (in this example, the display of the characters “Yoshimune RUSH rush!”) In addition, the error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is continuously displayed. The timing shown in (a3) in the figure is a state following the timing shown in (10) in the same figure, and shows a state where the big prize winning prize excess error has not been canceled. As described above, when the big prize winning prize excess error is not canceled, the display is stopped with the jackpot end display and the error display E3 being displayed, and the symbol variation or the like of the next special figure is not started.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display in the case where a big winning opening prize excess error has occurred in, for example, the fourth round after the second consecutive channel of the effect display example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 1B shows a state in which a winning effect is started. In this example, a character “Super Yoshimune Bonus” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2B is a state in which execution of the round effect is started. This round effect is, for example, an effect of executing a character introduction effect display during the effect. In this example, a round effect is performed near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the number of jackpots (number of consecutive villas) is displayed above the display area (here, “BONUS × 1” is displayed) and the acquired ball Number display and round display (here, “1R” display) are performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B1 is a state in which a round effect is being executed after the third round has been completed. At this timing, a display suggesting that the attacker unit 810 will be released from the next round (4R) (in this example, a character “Aim at the V attacker in the next round” and a downward-pointing arrow) is displayed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the round effect that the fourth round has started is being executed. At this timing, a display notifying that the attacker unit 810 is being opened (in this example, a character “Aim at the V attacker!” And a downward-pointing arrow) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B2 shows a state in which the fourth round is completed, and an effect of notifying that a V prize has been won (in this case, the display of the character “V” in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) )It is carried out.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B3, after the fourth round, an error display E3 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 for notifying a big prize winning prize excess error. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is displayed in addition to the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B4 shows the state in which the fifth round has started, and an error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is continuously displayed on top of the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows a state in which the sixth round has started, and a song selection effect is displayed in which a player can select a song by displaying a button and a song name. ing. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the over-winning prize winning error is continuously displayed over the music selection effect.

  When the player operates the operation button (key) as shown in (b5) in the state where the song selection effect shown in (7b) is being performed, the display is shown as shown in (b6). (Selectable) songs change. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the upper row and “Your Fragrance” is displayed in the lower row as selectable music titles. As shown in (b6), “Your Fragrance” moves as the selectable song name in the upper row, and “May be there” is displayed in the lower row. When the operation is performed, the selected song may be played from the timing of the operation, or the selected song may be played from the next round. When the round in which the song can be selected ends, the song selected when the round ends may be configured to start from the next round, or when the round in which the song can be selected ends. Only the following May be configured to tune to be reproduced is determined from und.

  It should be noted that the song (music piece) selected by the operation of the operation means may not be output from the speaker 120 during the notification of the extra prize winning prize excess error. Here, the notification by the speaker 120 of the extra prize winning prize excess error may be configured to continue for 30 seconds after the error is canceled, but for a certain period (for example, 30) after the error is started. 2 seconds), the notification by the speaker 120 is terminated, and the music selected by the operation of the operation means (not only the music selected by the operation of the operation means, but also the background display and various effects (for example, big hit round, etc.) ) May be configured to be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but may be the same as the notification by the speaker 120. Alternatively, the music may be output at a lower volume than when the error state is not established. It should be noted that the music selection effect as shown in FIG. 7B to FIG. 7B6 may be executed not only at the time of notification of the big prize opening abnormal error but also during symbol fluctuation or big hit. .

  The timing shown in (b7) in the figure shows a state in which the seventh round has started, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction (for example, a book is opened) The image of the state and the display of the characters “character introduction” have started.Also, in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the over-winning prize winning error is continuously displayed over the character introduction effect. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 8B8 shows a state in which the 16th round, which is the final round, has ended. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character introduction effect (in this example, the introduction of the character “Yoshimune”). Production) has started. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error is continuously displayed on the character introduction effect. It should be noted that the character introduction effect does not have to be executed during the extra prize winning prize excess error. The effect during the round is not limited to the character introduction effect, but may be an animation or a movie corresponding to the music being played.

  As described above, when the winning slot winning excess error is not canceled, an error display E3 for notifying the large winning prize winning excess error is displayed over a plurality of rounds.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (b) shows a state in which the jackpot game has ended, and a jackpot end display (here, “Yoshimune RUSH continued!”) Is displayed, and this is followed by a winning prize winning prize. The error display E3 for informing the excess error is continuously displayed. Note that the song selected during the big hit may be played back as it is after the big hit.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment detects a big prize winning excess error every round, and if the error occurs and the error is not canceled, the main control unit 300 Even if the big hit game) is completed, the symbol variation control is not started. In the example shown in FIG. 58, when a grand prize winning prize excess error is detected even in the final 16 round (when the big prize winning prize excess error has not been canceled even in the 16th round), (b8) of FIG. The display stops in the state, and the main control unit 300 does not start the symbol fluctuation control (the main control unit 300 does not start the control of the symbol fluctuation of the reserved special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2)).

  Here, “the state where the big hit game has ended” will be further described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 56. At timing (17), the big winning mouth winning excess error determination is made, and the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged match. If not (when the number of balls entered> the number of balls discharged), it is determined that the winning prize exit excess error has occurred (the error continues), and the special power 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the jackpot game The state in which is completed corresponds to FIG. 58 (b8). That is, in this state, the state in which the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped continues, and the main control unit 300 does not perform the symbol fluctuation control.

  As described above, in the processing flow described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 38 of this embodiment, the “state where the big hit game is finished” can be said to be a state where the big hit game is finished on the main control unit 300 side.

  It should be noted that the big hit game in the main control unit 300 may not be completed even when the special electric role 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing (17) in the timing chart of FIG. . For example, when the determination in step S1701 of the remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 33 is “No”, in the timing chart of FIG. However, before step S1703, it is determined whether or not a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred, and if a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred, the process is terminated. If a prize excess error has occurred, the special electric combination operation is not ended, and the remaining ball detection state remains. In addition, after step S1705, it is determined whether or not a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred. If a big prize winning prize excess error has occurred, even if the process is terminated, If a big prize exit excess error has occurred, the process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S705 of the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 21, since the big prize opening prize excess error is determined, the special figure state update process also determines that the big prize opening prize excess error has occurred. The control unit 300 can prevent the symbol variation control from being performed at the end of the big hit game. In other words, it is determined whether or not a big prize mouth winning excess error has occurred before step S1907 of the hit end display weight process in FIG. 35. If a big winning prize winning excess error has occurred, the process ends. By doing so, the special figure processing state is not set to the “waiting for change” state, so that the main control unit 300 can be in a state where the big hit game has not ended. On the other hand, for example, by determining the big prize winning prize excess error after step S1907 of the winning end display weight process, the special figure processing state is set to the “waiting for change” state, so that the big hit is finished. be able to.

  In addition, the “big hit ends” in the present embodiment may be when the external terminal board signal output during the big hit is turned off, or when the accessory continuous operation device is turned off. . Further, in the present embodiment, the “big hit ends” means that when the time after the big hit ends is a short time or a certain change, even if the low probability state (during the big hit) becomes the normal high probability state The special figure low probability state (during big hit) may be a special figure high probability state. Also, in the case of a model that is left-handed after the big hit, the right-hand-notifying means has finished the right-handed notification (for example, the right-handed lamp has changed from a lit state to an unlit state) Also good.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. FIG. 59 (b7-2) shows the timing following FIG. 58 (b7). For example, in the seventh round, the extra prize winning error is superimposed on the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction). In the case where the error display E3 for informing the user is displayed, when the big prize opening winning excess error is canceled, the error display E3 for notifying the big winning prize winning excess error is not displayed. In this case, the character introduction effect (switching display for character introduction) is continuously displayed, and thereafter the normal effect display is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the big hit ends, the big hit end display (here, the character “Yoshimune RUSH continued!”) Is displayed, and the next variation display of decorative symbols is executed. .

  FIG. 59 (b7-3) shows the timing following FIG. 58 (b7). For example, in the seventh round, the winning prize winning prize is superimposed on the character introduction effect (switching display for character introduction). In the case where an error display E3 for notifying an excess error is displayed, a QR code (registered trademark) may be displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b7-3), a notification suggesting the display of a QR code (registered trademark) (in this example, the “chance button is operated by the operation below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the player operates the chance button 136, the QR code (registered trademark) is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. In this case as well, when the big prize winning prize excess error has occurred (not canceled), the display of the error display E3 for notifying the big prize winning prize excess error is continued. In this case, other operations (for example, a volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, song change, setting operation for changing the selection effect image, etc.) may be performed, or the setting operation may not be performed.

  FIG. 60 shows the state of change / stop of the special figure when the big prize winning prize excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having two big prize winning openings (the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804). Operation / non-operation state of the accessory continuous operation device and condition device, driving (opening) / stopping (closing) state of the special prize opening 2 solenoid, operation / non-operational state of the special electric accessory (special electric role 2) , The operation / non-operation state of the special electric player 2 operating signal (for testing), the setting / non-setting state of the special electric officer 2 winning detection timer, the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch) provided in the second attacker 804 SW2) valid / invalid state, probability change area solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, probability change area valid / invalid state, winning prize 1 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) Condition, special electric The operation / non-operation state of the object (special electric role 1), the operation / non-operation state of the operation signal (for testing) of the special electric role 1, the setting / non-setting state of the special electric function 1 winning detection timer, the first Valid / invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the attacker 802, the big prize winning prize excess error flag, the security information signal, and the timing of the special prize winning prize excess error notification in the first sub-control unit 400 It is another example of a chart. In this example, it is assumed that an extra prize winning excess error is detected in a round (between timing (2) and timing (4)) during the big hit game.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special power 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In this embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this can be detected effectively, and it can be handled that it has been awarded effectively to the second attacker 804.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric function 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened), and the probability variation region is changed from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the count switch SW1. is there. Note that the count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the timing of the big winning opening 2 solenoid is reached at timing (4). The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. The In the present embodiment, in the state where the special electric combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 2 is inactivated. The special power 2 is in an operating state after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until a period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric charge operation delay timer is set, and the probability variation area solenoid stops (closes) driving. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in an open state → closed state → open state from timing (2) to, for example, timing (3), and the probability variation region continues to be valid during this period. .

  Also, in this example, a prize winning excess prize error is detected between timing (2) and timing (3), and the prize winning prize excess error flag is turned on at timing (5). The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing when the first sub-control unit 400 starts to notify the error of the extra prize winning prize excess error.

  Timing (7) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric role 1 is activated. Further, in this example, at this timing (7), the special power 1 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the inactive state to the active state.

  Timing (a) is a timing at which the special power 2 in-operation signal (for testing) is changed from the activated state to the non-actuated state after the special electric role 2 becomes inoperative in timing (5). In this example, since the special electric power operation interval timer set at timing (4) is as short as 20 ms, for example (the special electric character operation interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is 100 ms, for example) 2 After the variable prize winning opening (second attacker) 235 is closed, a test signal is added to the special electric power 2 operation signal for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) and output (the probability variation region shown in FIGS. 19 and 20) (See step S637 in the related setting process).

  As a result, after the timing (5) when the special power combination 2 is not activated, the special power 2 operation in-progress signal (for testing) is deactivated at the timing (a), and the probability variation region is changed from the valid state accordingly. It becomes invalid.

  At the timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the special electric character 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric character 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the count switch SW2. is there.

  If the same special power activation data (“special power activation data 1”) is used for the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 are used. And the same time. In addition, the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may set different special power operation data, so that the respective opening times may be different, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker Special electric power operation data used only in one of 804 may be prepared.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned maximum winning game ball winnings to the first attacker 802 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (9), the large winning opening 1 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. The In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. The special power 1 is in an operating state after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (10) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric utility operation delay timer is set.

  The timing (11) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (10) has elapsed, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the second prize winning port 2 solenoid is also driven, the second variable prize winning port 234 is opened, the special electric function 2 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the inactive state to the operating state, and the count switch SW2 is in the inactive state. It becomes effective state from.

  Timing (b) is a timing at which the special power 1 in-operation signal (for testing) is changed from the activated state to the non-actuated state after the special electric role 1 becomes inoperative in timing (10). In this example, since the special electric power operation interval timer set at the timing (9) is as short as 20 ms, for example (the special electric character operation interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is, for example, 100 ms), in order to prevent signal loss, 1 variable prize opening (first attacker) 234 is closed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and a test signal is added to the special electric power 1 operation signal and output (probability changing region shown in FIGS. 19 and 20) (See step S637 in the related setting process).

  As a result, after the timing (10) when the special power combination 1 becomes inoperative, the special power 1 operation in-progress signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b).

  At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (13), the big winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. The

  Timing (14) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric utility operation delay timer is set.

  The timing (15) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (14) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric role 1 is activated. In addition, the special power 1 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the inactive state to the active state at this timing.

  FIG. 61 shows the state of change / stop of special figure when a big prize winning prize excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having two big prize winning openings (the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804). The continuous operation device and the condition device are activated / not activated, the special prize opening 2 solenoid is driven (opened) / stopped (closed), the special electric accessory (special electricity role 2) is activated / not activated, The operation / non-operation state of the operating signal (for testing) of the special electric role 2; the setting / non-setting state of the special electric role 2 winning detection timer; the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2 provided in the second attacker 804) ) Valid / invalid state, Probability change area solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, Probability change area valid / invalid state, Winner 1 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state , Special electric role (Special Electric Utility 1) is activated / not activated, Special Electric Character 1 in-operation signal (for testing) is activated / not activated, Special Electric Utility 1 winning detection timer is set / not set, First Attacker Timing chart of notification of validity / invalidity of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided at 802, a special winning prize winning excess error flag, a security information signal, and a special winning prize winning excess error notification in the first sub-control unit 400 In this example, a case where the same attacker (for example, the second attacker 804) is released at a short timing will be described.In this example, a round in the jackpot game (timing (2)) is described. From time to time (4)), it is assumed that a big winning mouth winning excess error is detected.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special power 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In this embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this can be detected effectively, and it can be handled that it has been awarded effectively to the second attacker 804.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric function 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened), and the probability variation region is changed from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the count switch SW1. is there. Note that the count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the timing of the big winning opening 2 solenoid is reached at timing (4). The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special electric character operation interval timer (a timer for setting a period for detecting the remaining sphere, for example, 20 ms) is set, and a special electric character winning detection timer (special electric character 2 winning detection timer according to the second attacker 804) ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state where the special electric combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 2 is inactivated. The special power 2 is in an operating state after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round ends, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric charge operation delay timer is set, and the probability variation region solenoid stops driving. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in an open state → closed state → open state from timing (2) to, for example, timing (3), and the probability variation region continues to be valid during this period. .

  Also, in this example, a prize winning excess prize error is detected between timing (2) and timing (3), and the prize winning prize excess error flag is turned on at timing (5). The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing when the first sub-control unit 400 starts to notify the error of the extra prize winning prize excess error.

  Timing (7) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first prize opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric function 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is activated. From the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when becomes an operating state.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned maximum winning game ball winnings to the first attacker 802 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (9), the large winning opening 1 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. The In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. The special power 1 is in an operating state after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  Timing (10) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric utility operation delay timer is set.

  The timing (11) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (10) has elapsed, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven, and the second variable winning opening 234 is opened.

  In this example, the opening time (timing (7) to timing (9)) of the winning prize 1 solenoid is short, and the round interval (timing (5) to timing (11) of the same attacker (second attacker 804) is the same. Short period).

  In such a case, as described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 60, if the test signal is added to the special electric power 2 in-operation signal and output, a problem may occur. In other words, when the special power combination operation interval timer set at the timing (4) is as short as 20 ms, for example, a predetermined period after the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 is closed in order to prevent signal loss. It is desirable to add a test signal to the special electric power 2 operating signal, but when the round interval (timing (5) to timing (11)) of the same attacker (second attacker 804) is short During the opening of the second attacker 804 to be opened later, the special electric function 2 operating signal may become inactive. Specifically, the test signal for the special electric power 2 in-operation signal (refer to FIG. 56) that is not activated at the same time as the special electric power 2 is deactivated (see FIG. 56). For example, if it is assumed that it is added for 2 seconds, the special electric power work in progress signal (for testing) changes from the activated state to the unactuated state at the timing (a) in FIG. That is, even though the second attacker 804 released from the timing (11) is opened, the special electric power work in-progress signal (for testing) becomes inoperative. In order to prevent this, in step S1421 in FIG. 29, the test signal output timer is set to 0, the output period of the special electric function 2 operating signal (for testing) is extended, and the special electric utility 2 is released while the second attacker 804 is opened. The in-operation signal is not inactivated.

  In this example, at timing (11), the special electric combination 2 winning detection timer elapses after a set time has elapsed. This is because the round at which the second attacker 804 opens at the timing (11) starts (the special electric role 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state), so that 0 is forcibly set and ended. Yes (see step S1423 in FIG. 29).

  Timing (b) is a timing at which the special power 1 in-operation signal (for testing) is changed from the activated state to the non-actuated state after the special electric role 1 becomes inoperative in timing (10). In this example, since the special electric utility operation interval timer set at the timing (9) is as short as 20 ms, for example, in order to prevent the signal from being missed, the predetermined variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 is closed after being closed. During the period (for example, 2 seconds), the test signal is added to the special electric power 1 in-operation signal and output (see step S637 of the probability variation region related setting process shown in FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As a result, after the timing (10) when the special power combination 1 becomes inoperative, the special power 1 operation in-progress signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b). At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the special power 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the unset state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the enabled state to the disabled state.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won to the second attacker 804 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at timing (13), the big winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed), and the second attacker 804 enters a closed state. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. The

  Timing (14) is a timing when the period set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the special power combination 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric utility operation delay timer is set.

  The timing (15) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special power combination operation delay timer set in the timing (14) has elapsed, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this timing, the first prize opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric function 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is activated. From the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when becomes an operating state.

  Timing (20) is a timing at which the special power 2 signal output timer set at timing (13) becomes 0 and the special power 2 in-operation signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Further, at this timing, the probability variation region also changes from the valid state to the invalid state. In this example, during the period from timing (13) to timing (20), the probability variation area is in an effective state even though the special winning opening 2 solenoid is in the closed state (the second attacker 804 is in the closed state). It is a period. In this case, the probability variation region continues to be valid for three rounds in the period from timing (2) to timing (20).

  At the timing (21), the special electric character 2 winning detection timer ends after the set time has elapsed, and the count switch SW2 changes from the valid state to the invalid state. At timing (22), the driving of the first prize opening 1 solenoid is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. The

  Timing (23) is the timing when the period set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses and the special electric utility 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric utility operation delay timer is set.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 51 to 61, even if the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a big prize outlet discharge excess error) has occurred, after the big hit game has ended. Starts the fluctuation control of the special figure (fluctuation game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2). It should be noted that when the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a big prize outlet discharge excess error) has occurred, after the big hit game is over, There may be a case where the floating game of FIG. 2 is not started.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes a count switch SW and an out switch SO in the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, respectively, and the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are alternately opened. The closing operation is performed, and only the count switch (one of them) corresponding to the variable winning opening to be opened out of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is set to accept. It may be.

  Moreover, the following modifications are also applicable to this embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (f4), when a pattern is displayed by the light guide plate, the pattern may be plural. For example, a different pattern may be displayed at the position of the irradiation means (for example, LED) that emits light toward the light guide plate. Specifically, for example, the pattern A is displayed by irradiation from the LED arranged above, and the pattern B is displayed by light emission from the LED arranged on the left.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the liquid crystal display device D may perform operations such as rotation, vibration, and movement. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 may operate during each error described in the above embodiment. In that case, for example, similar to the effect movable body 224 in FIG. 53 (b3-2α), for example, The decorative symbol display device 208 may be operated as an effect moving means when notifying the extra prize winning prize excess error. In addition, a plurality of (for example, two, three, etc.) liquid crystal display devices D may be provided. Here, when a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D are provided, only one liquid crystal display device among the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D is configured to be operable, and the other one of the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D or The plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be configured to be inoperable (fixed), or one or the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D among the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D may be configured to operate, and the plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be configured to operate. Some other liquid crystal display devices of the display device D may be configured to be inoperable (fixed). The decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the liquid crystal display device D may be configured to be inoperable.

  The effect moving means (for example, the effect moving body 224) of the present embodiment may continue the operation of the effect moving means even when an error occurs during the operation of the effect moving means, but interrupts the operation. May be returned to the initial position. Further, depending on the type of error, there may be an error in which the effect moving means returns to the initial position when an error occurs, and an error in which the effect moving means does not return to the initial position when an error occurs. An example of an error that returns to the initial position is an error that stops game control, such as a magnetism (magnet) detection error. An example of an error that does not return to the initial position is a dish full tank error, but is not limited thereto. Here, “stop game control” means, for example, that the main control unit 300 is not executing processing related to winning or winning, and as a specific example, main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this case, the output management process (step S337) is skipped from the timer update process (step S311).

  Other examples of errors that return to the initial position include a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a big prize exit excess error, a big prize prize overexception error, a big ball goto error, a switch (sensor) unconnected error, and a switch (sensor ) Level error error, winning rate (general winning port, start port 2 (Den Chu), large winning port (attacker)) error error, shock error error, solenoid error error, pan full error (bottom tray full error, lower plate full) Tan error, upper tray full error), payout shortage error, payout number switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is set for a predetermined time (1000ms in the example), error when not received), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error, inner frame open Error, door open error, the external clock failure error, an impact sensor errors, impact warning may be any such Uchikata warning.

  Other examples of errors that do not return to the initial position include magnetism (magnet) detection error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, large prize exit excess error, big prize exit excess prize error, big ball goto error, switch (sensor ) Unconnected error, switch (sensor) level error error, winning rate (general winning award, start port 2 (electrical chew), large winning award (attacker)) error error, shock error error, solenoid error error, payout shortage error , Payout number switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), error when not received ), CR unit disconnected error, glass frame open error, inner frame open error, door open error, external clock error error, Hammer sensors errors, impact warning may be any such Uchikata warning.

  Further, as a modification of the effect moving means (for example, the effect moving body 224) provided in the game board 200, the effect moving means provided on the frame side (front frame door 106) may be used, and the effect moving means allows the prefetching. You may be comprised so that a preliminary announcement or the preliminary announcement of the said change may be performed. The effect moving means may be a part of the operation means unit. In this case, the effect moving means may be a part (for example, a button or a lever) that performs an operation, and the operation of the effect moving means at the time of the error notification described above (for example, the effect moving body in FIG. 53 (b3-2α)). As a modification of (operation 224), the button or lever may vibrate, protrude, dent, rotate, or the like. These operations may be performed by various effects such as a pre-reading notice, a notice of the change, a simultaneous effect (RTC effect), and a demo effect.

  In the above embodiment, the number of holds is displayed by the hold icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold may be displayed by turning on light emitting means such as an LED. In that case, a pre-reading notice may be given according to the color of the light emitting means, or special figure types (special figures 1 and 2) may be displayed separately.

  In addition, during the error described in the above embodiment, an effect (for example, outputting a winning sound, lighting a lamp, displaying with a liquid crystal) according to the entry to the general winning opening, start opening, and attacker may be performed. During an error, it may be configured not to perform a part or all of the production according to the entry to the general winning opening, the start opening, and the attacker. Here, “general winning opening, start opening, production according to the player's entry into the ball” means that the number of payouts is displayed (for example, the point (pt) display in FIG. 51 (4)) and decoration in the case of a big hit Effects by the symbol display device 208 and other display devices, effects by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214 and the general symbol display device 210 and other 7-segment display devices, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, the first Special symbol hold lamp 218, second special symbol hold lamp 220 and other lamps (LEDs) such as colors and light emission patterns, over winning notifications (sounds, lamps, decorative symbol display device 208 and other display devices) Etc. In the case of an over-winning notification effect, no sound may be output, or an error sound or a light emission pattern may be output. In addition, the “production based on the entrance to the general winning opening, start opening, and attacker” means that after the big hit, the notification corresponding to the winning of the starting opening or the general winning opening ((sound, lamp, decorative symbol display) Display on the device 208 or other display device), etc. All of the above effects may be mounted, or any one of them may be mounted.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention has an attacker (for example, the first attacker 802, the second attacker 804, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable prize). The game machine is provided with a winning opening 235) and a main control means (for example, main control unit 300), and the attacker is a ball sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, count switch SW1, count switch SW2). The entrance sensor is a sensor capable of outputting an entrance signal in response to an entrance of a game ball, and the attacker is a discharge sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, an out switch). SO, SO1, SO2,...), And the discharge sensor is a sensor that can output a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of the game ball. And the main control means is a means capable of executing a control for judging a plurality of types of errors, and one type of the plurality of types of errors is a first error (for example, a big prize winning prize) The first error is the number of game balls that have entered the attacker (hereinafter referred to as “the number of incoming balls”), and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the attacker (hereinafter, This is an error indicating that there are more than the “discharge number”), and the main control means performs symbol variation control (hereinafter referred to as “symbol variation control (for example, symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 26, or FIG. a) a special symbol related lottery process shown in a), a symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 26, and a special symbol display determination wait process shown in FIG. 27). Display means (for example, first special figure display device) 12, in the second special symbol display device 214), it is a control for performing the variation display of the symbol, and the main control means is a means for starting the symbol variation control when the big hit ends, The main control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the symbol variation control is not started during the occurrence of the first error.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by main control means.

  That is, in some cases, the store clerk or the player can easily notice that the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred.

  In addition, during the occurrence of the first error (for example, the big prize mouth over-exception error), the symbol variation control is not started and the player cannot play, so the first error (for example, over the big prize mouth prize winning) The error) can be reliably canceled by the store clerk, and the maintainability may be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the description of “excess winning prize winning error” can be read as “big winning entry / exit ball mismatch error”.

  Further, the display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a liquid crystal display device D) is provided, and the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. The display is a jackpot end display (for example, the display of FIG. 51 (10), the display of FIG. 52 (10a) to FIG. 52 (12a), etc.), and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is: This is a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “symbol variation display (for example, a display indicated by a downward arrow in FIG. 53 (16a)”), and after the jackpot end display is displayed, the symbol variation display is displayed. Even if the jackpot ends during the occurrence of the first error, the symbol variation display is not started and the jackpot end display is continuously displayed. There may be.

  According to such a configuration, even if the big hit ends, the big hit end display (screen) is displayed as it is, so that it is easy to notice that the first error (for example, a big winning prize winning excess error) has occurred. You may be able to.

  Here, the start timing of the decorative symbol variation display (symbol variation display) in the present embodiment is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, or the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols start to change in all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timing at which the decorative symbols start to change (starts moving on display) in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of This is the timing when it has started moving (in the display). The end timing of the decorative symbol variation display (symbol variation display) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300 or the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing at which the decorative symbol stops changing (stopped on display) or at all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on display, The timing when it was stopped.

  When the big hit end display is performed, the setting of the volume and the light amount (luminance) may be changed, or the setting may not be changed.

  In addition, when the big hit end display is performed, the production mode may be selected, or the production mode may not be selected.

  Further, when the big hit end display is performed, the simultaneous effect or the RTC effect may be executed by wiping or the like, or the simultaneous effect or the RTC effect may not be executed. If a simultaneous performance is started while the first error (for example, a grand prize winning prize excess error) has occurred, the simultaneous performance may be displayed on the entire screen or in a wipe, but a simultaneous performance sound is output from the speaker 120. It may not be performed (except for models that do not output BGM or sound effects in simultaneous production).

  In addition, when the big hit end display is performed, the effect related to the usual figure may or may not be executed.

  When the user mode can be set and the jackpot end display is performed, an effect related to the provision of a privilege may be performed. Here, the user mode is a mode that can be arbitrarily set by the player, and information on the games played between the start of the user mode setting and the end (the number of changes, the number of jackpots, preset) Completed missions (for example, the mission achievement conditions include consecutive resorts, jackpots, fluctuations, specific super reach, specific notices, playing at specific times, etc.) Grant of benefits (As an example of effects related to the grant of bonuses, the provision of experience values to raise the user level, and the effects that can be selected (customized) by the player (for example, characters that perform navigation and advance notice of games, various effects display) (Hold icon, background display, hold frame for displaying the hold icon) and music or game characteristics (for example, output during symbol fluctuation or big hit) Annunciation announcement (one-shot announcement or premier production) or a specific production (for example, operation of the operation means or movement of the production moving means, the fluctuation and / or the advance notice announcement that is likely to be a big hit if it occurs as a pre-reading notice. ) Is a mode in which it is easy to generate, etc.)), etc. In addition, it may be configured such that a privilege is given in response to an increase in the user level.

  Further, a pre-reading notice (for example, a pre-reading notice using characters such as “Large behavior!” In FIG. 52 (11a)) may be performed during the occurrence of the first error. There may be.

  According to such a configuration, since the jackpot end display is continuously displayed in spite of the pre-reading notice being made, the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

  In addition, when the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred, it may be stopped on the screen on which the pre-reading notice is displayed, and other screens (for example, prepaid card It may be stopped at a screen displaying a warning alert for forgetting to remove or a logo (maker logo) screen. Note that the alert notification (hereinafter referred to as “caution alert”) is not limited to “forgetting to pay a prepaid card”.

  Here, the alerting notification is notification that alerts the player about matters that are not directly related to the profit of the game. The game profit includes a prize ball awarded as a profit to the player and information related thereto. Since the contents of the alert notification do not directly affect the profit of the game, there is no effect on the profit of the game even if the player ignores the alert alert or does not follow the alert alert. However, the alert notification includes, for example, physical, mental, or monetary matters that may affect the player's profit other than the game profit.

  Note that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be a medal, for example. Also, it is not always necessary to give a player a real ball, medal, etc., for example, first, a profit is electronically given to the player, and the player uses the electronic profit for a game, It may be converted into a prize ball. Of course, the player may not be provided with the real thing, and the player may be able to exchange electronic profits for prizes. Further, the profit related to the game may be defined as that the profit can be used to play the game again on the game machine. In other words, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the game cannot be played again on the game stand even if the profit is used.

  Examples of alerts include “age restriction”, “strategy”, “game time”, “production”, “secondary use restriction”, “investment deterrence”, “prevention of forgetting”, “prevention of damage”, “ Prevention of forgetting to take (preventing forgetting to save) ".

  The alert notification with the name “age restriction” has the notification content “games under 18 years of age and admission to the playground are regulated by law”, and the notification timing is “during demonstration”. . That is, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variable game is inactive and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the "age restriction" alert notification is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that even if the game profit is obtained, the exchange to the prize is not permitted. The alert notification with the name “Capture Method” has the notification content “Beware of Vicious Strategy Sales” and the notification timing is “Demo”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alerting notification of the “strategy method” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that may pay money for useless information.

  The alert notification with the name “game time” is the notification content “If you play for a long time, please put a break moderately.”, The notification timing is “During Demonstration / 2 hours after game start Is. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “game time” is not followed, there are physical disadvantages such as a decrease in the player's physical function and fatigue due to a long game.

  The alert notification with the name “Direction” is the notification content “Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Be careful not to pinch your fingers etc. in the stage device. Please enjoy the game with appropriate volume and light intensity. The notification timing is “during demonstration / volume, light amount adjustment / volume, light amount adjustment screen display / volume, light amount setting change icon, etc.”. Disadvantages for players who fail to follow the cautionary alerts for `` directing '' include physical disadvantages such as decreased hearing due to high volume games and light-sensitive seizures caused by lighting or blinking of high-intensity lamps. is there.

  The alert notification with the name “Secondary use restriction” is the notification content is “Prohibit uploading of photos, videos, etc. to the Internet on this game machine”, and the notification timing is “During Demonstration / During Production Is. Disadvantages of players who fail to comply with the “secondary use restriction” alerts include monetary and social status disadvantages such as fines and imprisonment for violation of laws and regulations.

  The alert notification with the name “investment deterrence” is “Notice of excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a fun game to enjoy moderately”. The predetermined rotation speed has elapsed. A player's disadvantage caused by not following the “investment deterrence” alert notification is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

  The alert notification with the name “Prevent forgetting to pick” is “Notice to forget to remove the prepaid card” or “Beware of forgetting to remove the prepaid card or theft”. It is “at the end / at the end of the power support state”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “prevention of forgetting” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the balance in the prepaid card that has been forgotten. In addition, you may perform the alerting alerting | reporting of the said "forgetting prevention" at timings other than the above-mentioned timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurred in the normal gaming state, a “not forgetting” warning alert is notified, and at the end of the big hit in the villa that occurred with the big hit, It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, if the jackpot is less profitable than other jackpots, or if the jackpot is not profitable, a “forget-to-forget” warning alert is reported. It does not have to be done. In the first place, if a player forgets to take a prepaid card, there is a prepaid card in which the player's consciousness is added to the profit when the profit is given with the remaining balance on the prepaid card. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” warning is issued immediately after the player has been given a profit, and the player forgets the presence of the prepaid card. It is desirable to be notified after the benefits are granted. Furthermore, the trigger for the “forget-to-forget” warning alert is most effective when the player quits the game. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” attention alert notification is notified at a timing when a state advantageous to the player ends such as at the end of ST in FIG. Also, be careful of “prevent forgetting” at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change) (for example, during the big hit end effect or at the start of the first rotation after the big hit ends) You may alert | report alerting. In addition, "prevent forgetting" at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state in the special figure high probability state (probability change) You may alert | report alerting alerting | reporting. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert. Further, it is not necessary to notify the “prevent forgetting” alert at the end of the small hit game based on winning the small hit.

  The alert alert with the name “Prevention of damage” is the notification content “Don't operate the operation means with a strong force because there is a risk of damage.” The notification timing is “During demonstration / during performance” is there. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the warning notification of “breakage prevention” is not followed, there is a physical disadvantage of being injured due to damage to the operation means.

  The alert notification with the name “Preventing forgetting to take (preventing forgetting to save)” is informing the user that “The user mode is being set. Be careful not to forget to take a two-dimensional barcode at the end of the game.” The timing is “during demo / setting user mode (always)”. There is a gaming disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are lost as a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “Preventing forgetting to take” is not followed. However, it is not a game penalty related to money. Note that the notification timing of the above alerting notification does not necessarily have to be executed at the above timing.

  Moreover, it may be performed at timings other than the notification timing described above. In addition, the above alerting notification is merely an example, and other alerting notifications other than those described above may be executed.

  Further, the alerting notification (notification that is not at least related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the illustrated example, and if the player does not follow the notified contents, the player may have a disadvantage different from the game profit. It only has to be generated.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol. The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a stop display of the decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “symbol stop display (for example, FIG. 54)”. (Symbol stop display shown in (12f)) ”), and when there is a hold when the big hit ends, the symbol variation display is started after the symbol stop display is displayed. When the first error has occurred during the display of the symbol stop display after the big hit ends, the symbol variation display display is not started even if there is the suspension, and the symbol Stop display continues It is configured to, or may be.

  Moreover, when there is no holding | maintenance, after the jackpot end display is displayed, you may be comprised so that the display of a change of a symbol may not be started. Moreover, when there is no holding | maintenance, you may be comprised so that a symbol demo may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the symbol stop display is kept displayed even if there is a hold, so that it is easy to notice that the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error) has occurred. May be possible.

  Note that “hold” in the present embodiment means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on the start information is put on hold.

  In addition, when there is a hold when the big hit ends, a hold icon corresponding to the number of the hold may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, since the jackpot end display is continuously displayed in spite of the pre-reading notice being made, the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

  Note that the “hold icon” in the present embodiment corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  In addition, after the jackpot is over, there may be a case where the hold is not displayed depending on the game state (probability / short time / normal) and the type of special figure. For example, depending on the gaming state (probability / short time / normal), the special figure 2 hold may be displayed, but the special figure 1 hold may not be displayed (or vice versa).

  Further, after the big hit is over, the hold may be displayed regardless of the gaming state (probability change / short time / normal) and the type of special figure.

  In addition, a prefetch hold icon (for example, a prefetch hold icon shown in FIG. 54 (f2)) may be displayed as the hold icon during display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error. It may be.

  According to such a configuration, the pre-read hold icon may be displayed even during the occurrence of the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error), so that the first error is canceled by the store clerk. It may be possible to have a period between.

  In addition, since the pre-read hold icon is displayed, it may be possible to prompt the cancellation of the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error).

  Note that the pre-reading notice display may be performed during the display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error (for example, the big prize mouth winning excess error). In this case, the prefetch notice display may be a prefetch notice display corresponding to the increased hold. Further, it may be a pre-reading notice display for other winning-ahead prefetching notices.

  In addition, one type of display among the plurality of types of display is an error display,

  The display means may display a first error display (for example, an error display E1 shown in FIG. 51 (6)) as the error display, and the first error display is the first error display. It may be displayed during the occurrence of the error.

  The main control means may be means for determining the first error when the number of entered balls is greater than the number of discharged balls after a round of the big hit is completed.

  The main control unit may be a unit configured to perform control to start the symbol variation control when it is determined that the first error has been resolved.

  Further, the discharge sensor is a means composed of a plurality of sensors, and one sensor of the plurality of sensors is a first discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO1), One of the sensors is a second discharge sensor (for example, the out switch SO2), and the number of discharges is the number of game balls detected by the first discharge sensor and the second discharge sensor It may be the number obtained by adding the number of detected game balls.

  Note that the number of discharge sensors may be one, two, or three or more.

  Moreover, the said entrance sensor may be a means comprised from one sensor.

  Note that the number of entrance sensors may be one, two, or three or more.

  In addition, one type of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, a big prize outlet discharge excess error), and the second error is the number of discharges when the number of balls entered The main control means may start the symbol variation control after the big hit ends even if the main control means determines that the error is the second error. It may be a means.

  For example, even if the main control means determines that the second error has occurred, the symbol variation control may be started if there is a hold after the big hit ends.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  Moreover, even if said 1st error generate | occur | produces in the big hit, the thing configured so that this big hit may be continued.

  For example, even if the first error occurs in a certain round of big hits, the next round production (in the case of the final round, the big hit end production) may be advanced. Further, the main control means may be means for continuing the big hit control until the big hit ends when the first error occurs in a round of big hit.

  Further, the main control means may be means for not starting the symbol variation control when there is no suspension when the big hit ends.

  In the above embodiment, even if the first error (for example, a big prize opening prize excess error) occurs, the game state may not change (no game control is performed or the special figure changing operation is interrupted). You do n’t have to).

  Further, the cancellation of the first error (for example, the big prize winning prize excess error) may be automatically canceled after a certain period of time has elapsed since the detection of the first error.

  In the above-described embodiment, an effect that is started when there is a certain number of suspensions may be performed. This effect is, for example, in the case of eight winning holds in a winning order type model equipped with a start-up unit (eight chucker) that includes a sorting device that alternately distributes special figure 1 and special figure 2. An effect that notifies the fact that eight holds have been accumulated in the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect that informs that an effect is caused by the accumulation of eight holds from the next change. and so on.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the music output during the big hit is output as it is even with the symbol fluctuation after the big hit, it continues as it is even during the first error (for example, the big winning mouth winning excess error). The music may be output. In this case, during the first error (for example, a big prize winning prize excess error), the volume of the song that is a big hit may be output as it is for control, but it is output as it is at a reduced volume. May be. Further, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the music after the first error (for example, the big prize opening prize excess error) is canceled.

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control unit (for example, the first control unit). 1 sub-control unit 400), wherein the first control means is a means capable of executing control to transmit a plurality of types of commands to the second control means, One type of command among the types of commands is an error-related command, and the first control unit is a unit capable of determining a plurality of types of errors, and one type of the plurality of types of errors. Is a first error (for example, an error that does not stop the operation of the main controller 300 such as a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a vibration error, a switch non-connection error, etc.), and the first control means Judged as the first error A first error flag is set, and the first control unit prepares to transmit the error-related command to the second control unit (hereinafter referred to as “transmission preparation process (for example, The device monitoring process (referred to as step S329) of the main control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 15) is performed every first cycle, and the first control means And means for executing the transmission preparation process of the first error command as the error-related command when the first period is reached in a state where the first error flag is set. It is a characteristic game stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  That is, since the first error command (for example, an error command for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) can be periodically transmitted, the transmission burden on the first control unit may be reduced.

  In addition, one type of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, an error that stops the main control operation such as a magnet (magnet) detection error), and the first control means The second error flag is set when the second error is determined, and when the second error flag is set, the first control means sets the error related command as the error related command. It may be a means for executing the transmission preparation process of the second error command.

  The first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the transmission preparation process of the second error command without waiting for the arrival of the first period.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to set the one that waits for the error command transmission cycle and the one that does not wait depending on the type of error, so that there is an error that should be immediately transmitted to the second control means. In some cases, the transmission burden on the first control means can be reduced while dealing with the occurrence.

  Further, the first control means is means capable of executing control to output a signal to be output to the outside of the gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “external signal (for example, security information signal)”). One control unit may be a unit that executes control to output the external signal when the first error flag is set.

  The first control means may output a security information signal when the first error flag is set, but may not output other signals (other external terminal board signals). In addition, the period of the first period (subcommand transmission period in the main control unit 300) may be shorter, longer, or the same as the period (eg, 30 seconds) during which the security information signal is output. May be.

  Further, the first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the control for outputting the external signal without waiting for the arrival of the first period.

  According to such a configuration, since the external signal is transmitted without waiting for the first cycle (subcommand transmission cycle in the main control unit 300), the store side notices that an abnormality of the gaming machine has occurred. Sometimes it can be made easier.

  Further, the first control means is a means in which an interrupt process (for example, a main control unit timer interrupt process) may be executed in a second cycle, and the interrupt process is a game progress It is a process including the process regarding, and may be configured to be the first period by repeating the second period N times.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of display among the plurality of types of display is an error display. (For example, error display E1), and when the second control means receives the first error command, the second error is displayed on the display means as the first error display (for example, FIG. 43 (6)). The error display E1) may be displayed by the characters “A radio wave has been detected” shown in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it may be easy to notice that an error has occurred.

  There may be an error displaying an error display and an error not displaying it.

  The first control means executes control to transmit an error cancellation command as the error-related command when the first period is reached in a state where it is determined that the first error has been canceled. It may be a means to do.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 may be configured as separate substrates, respectively, or the VRAM 436 may be used as a substrate (first sub substrate 160) constituting the first sub control unit 400. Alternatively, a configuration in which a VDP 434 or the like is mounted and the effect control and the liquid crystal control are executed by the CPU 404 of one first sub-control unit 400 may be used.

  Note that the embodiments and various examples (modifications) described so far can be implemented by combining or replacing all or a part of each configuration.

  Further, the game stand according to the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 156 Main control board 160 1st sub control board 170 Discharge control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative design display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st Special drawing start port 232 Second special drawing start port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (9)

A first control means;
A second control means;
A game machine equipped with
The first control means is a means capable of executing control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the second control means,
One type of command among the plurality of types of commands is an error-related command,
The first control means is means capable of determining a plurality of types of errors,
One type of the plurality of types of errors is a first error,
The first control means is means for setting a first error flag when it is determined as the first error,
The first control unit may perform a process for preparing to transmit the error-related command to the second control unit (hereinafter referred to as a “transmission preparation process”) every first cycle. Configured means,
The first control means executes the transmission preparation process of the first error command as the error-related command when the first period is reached while the first error flag is set. Is a means to
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
One type of the plurality of types of errors is a second error,
The first control means is means for setting a second error flag when the second error is determined,
The first control means is means for executing the transmission preparation process of a second error command as the error-related command when the second error flag is set.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The first control means is means configured to execute the transmission preparation process of the second error command without waiting for the arrival of the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3, Comprising:
The first control means is a means capable of executing control to output a signal to be output to the outside of the gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “external signal”);
The first control means is means for executing control to output the external signal when the first error flag is set.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The first control means is a means configured to execute the control for outputting the external signal without waiting for the arrival of the first cycle.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
The first control means is a means that interrupt processing may be executed in a second cycle,
The interrupt process is a process including a process related to the progress of a game,
The second cycle is configured to be the first cycle by being repeated N times.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 6, Comprising:
A display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an error display,
The second control unit is a unit that may display a first error display as the error display on the display unit when the first error command is received.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 7, Comprising:
The first control means executes control for transmitting an error release command as the error-related command when the first period is reached in a state where it is determined that the first error has been released. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 8, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.